2003 Chevrolet SSR Owner Manual M - General … · Service and Appearance Care ... 2003 Chevrolet...

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Safety Belts .............................................. 1-6Child Restraints ....................................... 1-20Airbag Systems ........................................ 1-40Restraint System Check ............................ 1-52

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-2Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-7Windows ................................................. 2-10Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-12Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-14Mirrors .................................................... 2-24HomeLink® Transmitter ............................. 2-26Storage Areas ......................................... 2-31Convertible Top ....................................... 2-37Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-44

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2Climate Controls ...................................... 3-18Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-22Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-41Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-58

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-30

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-5Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10Rear Axle ............................................... 5-42Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-42Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-43Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-48Tires ...................................................... 5-51Appearance Care ..................................... 5-72Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-80Electrical System ...................................... 5-81Capacities and Specifications ..................... 5-90Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 5-91

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 7-8

Index ................................................................ 1

2003 Chevrolet SSR Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the nameSSR are registered trademarks of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. We reserve the right to make changesafter that time without further notice. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wheneverit appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there ifneeded when you are on the road. If the vehicle is sold,leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual from beginning toend when they first receive their new vehicle. If thisis done, it can help you learn about the featuresand controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words worktogether in the owner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information about thevehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It isan alphabetical list of what is in the manual andthe page number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. C2339 A First Edition ©2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in this book. Weuse a box and the word CAUTION to tell about thingsthat could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reducethe hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle. Many times, this damage would not be coveredby your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. Butthe notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors orin different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They usethe same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference the followingtopics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

v

✍ NOTES

vi

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Power Seats ..................................................1-2Heated Seats .................................................1-4Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4Seatback Latches ...........................................1-6

Safety Belts .....................................................1-6Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-6Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-11How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-12Driver Position ..............................................1-12Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-18Passenger Position .......................................1-19Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-19

Child Restraints .............................................1-20Older Children ..............................................1-20Infants and Young Children ............................1-22Child Restraint Systems .................................1-25Top Strap ....................................................1-29Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-31

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) ...........................1-31

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for theLATCH System .........................................1-33

Securing a Child Restraint in the PassengerSeat Position ............................................1-36

Airbag Systems ..............................................1-40Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-42When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-45What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-46How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-46What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-47Airbag Off Switch ..........................................1-48Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-52

Restraint System Check ..................................1-52Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-52Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ............................................1-53

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1

Front Seats

Power Seats

Driver’s Seat

The power seat controls are located on the outboardside of the driver’s seat.

Horizontal Control• Move the front of the seat control up or down to

adjust the front portion of the cushion.

• Move the rear of the seat control up or down toadjust the rear portion of the cushion.

• Lift up or push down on the center of the seatcontrol to move the entire seat up or down.

• Slide the seat control forward or rearward to movethe seat forward or rearward.

Vertical ControlThe vertical control is used to operate the powerlumbar.

Adjust the seat cushion using the horizontal control.To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbackson page 1-4. Once the seat is in the desired position,adjust the lumbar.

Press the vertical control forward to increase supportand rearward to decrease support.

If your vehicle has the memory seat feature, you canprogram seat positions for up to two drivers. SeeMemory Seat on page 2-44 for more information.

Power seat with memory seat controls shown

1-2

Passenger’s Seat

The power seat controls are located on the outboardside of the passenger’s seat.

Horizontal ControlTo adjust the seat, slide the control forward or rearwardto move the seat forward or rearward.

Vertical ControlThe vertical control is used to operate the powerlumbar.

Adjust the seat cushion using the horizontal control.To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbackson page 1-4. Once the seat is in the desired position,adjust the lumbar.

Press the vertical control forward to increase supportand rearward to decrease support.

1-3

Heated Seats

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the switches arelocated on the outboardside of the driver’sand passenger’s seats.

This feature will heat the lower cushion and lower backof the driver’s and passenger’s seats.

Press LO to turn the heater on low. Press HI to turn theheater on high. Put the switch in the center positionto turn the heater off.

The engine must be running for the heated seats to work.Also, the passenger’s safety belt must be buckled for theheated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.

If you turn the ignition off when the heated seats are on,the heated seats will turn off. They will come on againwhen you restart the vehicle.

Reclining SeatbacksThe seatbacks in your vehicle provide head restraint,helping to prevent neck injury in a rear impact, but theydo not provide rollover protection.

To recline the seatback, lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat cushion.

Release the lever to lock the seatback where youwant it. Pull up on the lever without pushing on theseatback, and the seat will go to an upright position.

1-4

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety belts cannot do theirjob when you are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job because itwill not be against your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crash you could go into it,receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell back in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.

1-5

Seatback LatchesTo fold the seatbackforward, push the lever onthe side of the seatbackrearward and pull theseatback forward.

To return the seatback to the upright position, push it allthe way back until the latch catches. If the seatbackwas reclined before being folded forward, it will return tothe reclined position.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspress rearward on the seatback to be sure it islocked.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you are not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passenger’s belt isfastened properly too.

1-6

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Do notallow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety Belt ReminderLight on page 3-24.

In most states and all Canadian provinces, the law saysto wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have acrash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walkaway. Without belts they could have been badly hurtor killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter...a lot!

1-7

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat onwheels.

Put someone on it.

1-8

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoesn’t stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-9

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s whysafety belts make such good sense.

1-10

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you’re wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you’re upside down. And your chanceof being conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greaterif you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I haveto wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and willbe in most of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of them. Every airbagsystem ever offered for sale has required the useof safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle thathas airbags, you still have to buckle up to get themost protection. That’s true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in anaccident — even one that isn’t your fault — youand your passenger can be hurt. Being a gooddriver doesn’t protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-11

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and babies. If a child will beriding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-20or Infants and Young Children on page 1-22. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wearit properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-19.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-12

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this appliesforce to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be lesslikely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should goover the shoulder and across the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-13

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-14


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there, not at thepelvic bones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

1-15


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.

1-16


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you would not have the full widthof the belt to spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

1-17

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out ofthe way. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-18

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is morelikely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the passenger’s safety beltproperly, see Driver Position on page 1-12.

The passenger’s safety belt works the same way asthe driver’s safety belt — except for one thing. Ifyou ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out allthe way, you will engage the child restraint lockingfeature. If this happens, just let the belt go back allthe way and start again.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer willorder you an extender. It is free. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someone else use it, anduse it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Never use it for securingchild seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regularsafety belt. For more information, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.

1-19

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restrainta shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lapbelt should fit snugly below the hips, just touchingthe top of the thighs. It should never be wornover the abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-20

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt can not properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, butbe sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’sshoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upperbody would have the restraint that belts provide.

1-21

{CAUTION:

Never do this.Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the belt inthis way, in a crash the child might slide underthe belt. The belt’s force would then be appliedright on the child’s abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries.

The lap portion of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. Thisapplies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by appropriaterestraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’sadult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

1-22

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their armswhile riding in a vehicle. A baby does notweigh much — until a crash. During a crash ababy will become so heavy it is not possible tohold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenlybecome a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’sarms. A baby should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

1-23

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by thevehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight, height,and age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasinga child restraint, be sure it is designed to beused in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint willhave a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborn infant’sneck is weak and its head weighs so muchcompared with the rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing seat settles intothe restraint, so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongest part of aninfant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infantsalways should be secured in appropriateinfant restraints.

1-24

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. Youngchildren always should be secured inappropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in amotor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designedto restrain or position a child on a continuous flatsurface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe center of the vehicle.

1-25

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with theseating surface against the back of the infant. Theharness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint forthe child’s body with the harness and also sometimeswith surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

1-26

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,and some high-back booster seats have a five-pointharness. A booster seat can also help a child to seeout the window.

1-27

Q: How do child restraints work?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed foruse in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or positionchildren. A built-in child restraint system is apermanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-onchild restraint system is a portable one, whichis purchased by the vehicle’s owner.

For many years, add-on child restraints haveused the adult belt system in the vehicle. To helpreduce the chance of injury, the child also has tobe secured within the restraint. The vehicle’sbelt system secures the add-on child restraint in thevehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harnesssystem holds the child in place within the restraint.

One system, the three-point harness, hasstraps that come down over each of the infant’sshoulders and buckle together at the crotch.The five-point harness system has two shoulderstraps, two hip straps and a crotch strap. A shieldmay take the place of hip straps. A T-shapedshield has shoulder straps that are attached to aflat pad which rests low against the child’s body.A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps thatare attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swingsup or to the side.

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the childrestraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,it will have a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt systemin your vehicle, but the child also has to be securedwithin the restraint to help reduce the chance of personalinjury. When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraint which maybe on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, andto this manual. The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

The child restraint must be secured properly in thepassenger seat. If you want to secure a rear-facing childrestraint in the passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’sair bag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-48 andSecuring a Child Restraint in the Passenger SeatPosition on page 1-36 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

1-28

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the passenger’sairbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very closeto the inflating airbag. Be sure to turn off theairbag before using a rear-facing child restraintin the passenger seat position.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can movearound in a collision or sudden stop and injure people inthe vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraintin your vehicle – even when no child is in it.

Top StrapSome child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchoredto the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraintsare designed for use with or without the top strapbeing anchored. Others require the top strap alwaysto be anchored. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint. If yours requiresthat the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraintunless it is anchored properly.

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, onecan be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or nota kit is available.

1-29

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top strap, and that the strap beanchored. In the United States, some child restraintsalso have a top strap. If your child restraint has atop strap, it should be anchored.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether bracket is designed to anchoronly one child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single bracket couldcause the anchor to come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or others could beinjured if this happens. To help prevent injuryto people and damage to your vehicle, attachonly one child restraint per bracket.

To locate the top strap anchor see “Top Strap AnchorLocation” following.

Once you have the top strap anchored, you will beready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the topstrap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions say.

1-30

Top Strap Anchor Location

Your vehicle has a topstrap anchor for thepassenger’s seatingposition. The anchor islocated on the backof the seat.

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)Your vehicle is equipped with the LATCH system.There are anchors for the passenger seat.

This system, designed to make installation of childrestraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraintattachments to secure the restraints. Some restraintsalso use another vehicle anchor to secure a toptether strap.

A. Lower AnchorageB. Lower AnchorageC. Top Tether

1-31

A. Lower AnchorageB. Lower Anchorage

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, youneed a child restraint designed for that system.

To assist you in locating the anchors for this childrestraint system, the passenger seat has visible metalanchors in the seat, where the seatback meets theseat cushion.

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attachedto its anchorage points, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injured orkilled. Make sure that a LATCH-type childrestraint is properly installed using theanchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

1-32

Securing a Child Restraint Designedfor the LATCH SystemYour vehicle has a passenger airbag. There is an airbagoff switch in the glove box you can use to turn off thepassenger’s airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-48for more on this, including important safety information.

Unless the passenger’s airbag has been turned off,never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.

Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the passenger’sairbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very closeto the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in this vehicle unless thepassenger’s airbag has been turned off.

Even though the airbag off switch is designedto turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, even though it is turnedoff. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be transported in vehicles with arear seat that will accommodate a rear-facingchild restraint, whenever possible.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the passenger seat, always movethe passenger seat as far back as it will go.

1-33

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes onwhen you have turned off the passenger’sfrontal airbag, it means that something may bewrong with the airbag system. The passenger’sfrontal airbag could inflate even though theswitch is off. If this ever happens, do not letanyone whom the national government hasidentified as a member of a passenger airbagrisk group sit in the passenger’s position(for example, do not secure a rear-facing childrestraint in your vehicle) until you have yourvehicle serviced. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 1-48.

1. Your vehicle has a passenger’s airbag. SeeAirbag Off Switch on page 1-48. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, always move the seatas far back as it will go before securing it inthis seat. See Power Seats on page 1-2. Neveruse a rear-facing child restraint in this seat unlessthe airbag is off.

2. Find the LATCH anchorages in the passengerseat. See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) on page 1-31.

3. Put the child restraint on the seat.

4. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments onthe child restraint to the LATCH anchorages inthe vehicle. The child restraint instructions willshow you how.

5. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.The child restraint instructions will show youhow. Also see Top Strap on page 1-29.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

1-34

To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the topstrap from the top tether anchor and then disconnectthe anchor points.

If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turnon the passenger’s air bag when you remove therear-facing child restraint from the vehicle unless theperson who will be sitting there is a member of apassenger airbag risk group. See Airbag Off Switchon page 1-48.

{CAUTION:

If the passenger’s frontal airbag is turnedoff for a person who is not in a risk groupidentified by the national government, thatperson will not have the extra protection of afrontal airbag. In a crash, the airbag would notbe able to inflate and help protect the personsitting there. Do not turn off the passenger’sfrontal airbag unless the person sitting thereis in a risk group. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 1-48 for more on this, including importantsafety information.

1-35

Securing a Child Restraint in thePassenger Seat Position

Your vehicle has a passenger air bag. There is an airbag off switch in the glove box you can use to turnoff the passenger’s air bag. See Airbag Off Switchon page 1-48 for more on this, including importantsafety information.

Unless the passenger’s air bag has been turned off,never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.

1-36

Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the passenger’sairbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very closeto the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in this vehicle unless thepassenger’s airbag has been turned off.

Even though the airbag off switch is designedto turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, even though it is turnedoff. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be transported in vehicles with arear seat that will accommodate a rear-facingchild restraint, whenever possible.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the passenger seat, always movethe passenger seat as far back as it will go.

{CAUTION:


If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-31. See Top Strapon page 1-29 if the child restraint has one.

1-37

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you will be using the lap-shoulder belt. Be sure tofollow the instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a passenger’s air bag. If you areusing a rear-facing child restraint in this seat, makesure the air bag is turned off. See Airbag OffSwitch on page 1-48. If your child restraint isforward-facing, always move the seat as far backas it will go before securing it in this seat. SeePower Seats on page 1-2.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-38

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. You may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

7. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

1-39

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn on thepassenger’s air bag when you remove the rear-facingchild restraint from the vehicle unless the person who willbe sitting there is a member of a passenger air bag riskgroup. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-48.

{CAUTION:

If the passenger’s frontal airbag is turned offfor a person who is not in a risk groupidentified by the national government, thatperson will not have the extra protection of afrontal airbag. In a crash, the airbag would notbe able to inflate and help protect the personsitting there. Do not turn off the passenger’sfrontal airbag unless the person sitting thereis in a risk group. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 1-48 for more on this, including importantsafety information.

Airbag SystemsThis part explains the frontal and side impact air bagsystems.

Your vehicle has four air bags – a frontal air bag for thedriver, another frontal air bag for the passenger, aside impact air bag for the driver, and another sideimpact air bag for the passenger.

Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do theirjob and comply with federal regulations.

Here are the most important things to know about theair bag systems:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you are not wearing your safety belt — evenif you have airbags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduce your chance

CAUTION: (Continued)

1-40


of hitting things inside the vehicle or beingejected from it. Airbags are designed to workwith safety belts but do not replace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and passengerare designed to deploy only in moderate tosevere frontal and near frontal crashes. Theyare not designed to inflate in rollover, rear orlow-speed frontal crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provide lessprotection in frontal crashes than moreforceful airbags have provided in the past.

The side impact airbags for the driver andpassenger are designed to inflate only inmoderate to severe crashes where somethinghits the side of your vehicle. They are notdesigned to inflate in frontal, in rollover or inrear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbags inflatewith great force, faster than the blink of aneye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,as you would be if you were leaning forward, itcould seriously injure you. Safety belts helpkeep you in position for airbag inflation beforeand during a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle. Frontoccupants should not lean on or sleep againstthe door.

1-41

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults, butnot for young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Young childrenand infants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Always securechildren properly in your vehicle. To read how,see Older Children on page 1-20 or Infants andYoung Children on page 1-22.

There is an air bagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the air bag symbol.

The system checks the air bag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-25for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

1-42

The passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrument panelon the passenger’s side.

The driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of thedriver’s seatback closest to the door.

1-43

The passenger’s side impact airbag is in the side of thepassenger’s seatback closest to the door.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the airbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into that personcausing severe injury or even death. The pathof an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Donot put anything between an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or put anything onthe steering wheel hub or on or near any otherairbag covering. Do not let seat covers blockthe inflation path of a side impact airbag.

1-44

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbagsare designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflateonly if the impact exceeds a predetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholds take into accounta variety of desired deployment and non-deploymentevents and are used to predict how severe a crashis likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbagswill or should deploy is not based on how fast yourvehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors,which help the sensing system distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a more severe frontalimpact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbagsinflate at a level less than full deployment. Formore severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the threshold level forthe reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a fulldeployment is about 20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h).(The threshold level can vary, however, with specificvehicle design, so that it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.)

Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbagcould inflate at a different crash speed than ifthe object were moving.

• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at adifferent crash speed than if the object does notdeform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) theairbag could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle theairbag could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts because inflationwould not likely help the occupants.

1-45

Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes. A side impact airbag willinflate if the crash severity is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.” The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags arenot designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would notlikely help the occupant. A side impact airbag willonly deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costswere. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined bythe angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicleslows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For sideimpact airbags, inflation is determined by the locationand severity of the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensingsystem detects that the vehicle is in a crash. Forboth frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing systemtriggers a release of gas from the inflator, whichinflates the airbag. The inflator, the airbag and relatedhardware are all part of the airbag modules insidethe steering wheel, the instrument panel, and the sideof the front seatbacks closest to the door.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protectionprovided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. But thefrontal airbags would not help you in many typesof collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and manyside impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would nothelp you in many types of collisions, including frontalor near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,primarily because an occupant’s motion is not towardthose airbags. Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplement to safety belts, andthen only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and passenger’s frontal airbags,and only in moderate to severe side collisions forvehicles with a driver’s and passenger’s side impactairbag.

1-46

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quicklythat some people may not even realize the air baginflated. Some components of the air bag module willbe hot for a short time. These components includethe steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal air bagand the instrument panel for the passenger’s frontalair bag and the side of the seatback closest to thedriver’s and/or passenger’s door. The parts of the bagthat come into contact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There will be some smoke anddust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags.Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeingor being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stoppeople from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there is dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone inthe vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto do so. If you have breathing problems butcannot get out of the vehicle after an airbaginflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or a door. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlockthe doors and turn the interior lamps on when the airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lockthe doors again and turn the interior lamps off byusing the door lock and interior lamp controls.

1-47

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur fromthe passenger air bag.

• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran air bag inflates, you’ll need some new partsfor your air bag system. If you don’t get them, theair bag system won’t be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system will include air bagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equippedwith a crash sensing and diagnostic module,which records information about the frontal air bagsystem. The module records information aboutthe readiness of the system, when the systemcommands air bag inflation and driver’s safety beltusage at deployment. The module also recordsspeed, engine RPM, brake and throttle data.

• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bagsystems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system won’t work properly. See your dealerfor service.

Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’sor the passenger’s airbag, the bag may not workproperly. You may have to replace the airbag modulein the steering wheel or both the airbag module andthe instrument panel for the passenger’s airbag.Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

Airbag Off Switch

Your vehicle has a switch inside the glovebox that youcan use to turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag.

United States Canada

1-48

This switch should only be turned to the off position ifthe person in the passenger’s position is a member ofa passenger risk group identified by the nationalgovernment as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)must ride in the front seat because:• my vehicle has no rear seat;

• my vehicle has a rear seat too small toaccommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or

• the infant has a medical condition which, accordingto the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for theinfant to ride in the front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 mustride in the front seat because:• my vehicle has no rear seat;

• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rearseat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to12 sometimes must ride in the front because nospace is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle;or

• the child has a medical condition which, accordingto the child’s physician, makes it necessary for thechild to ride in the front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Medical Condition. A passenger has amedical condition which, according to hisor her physician:• causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk

for the passenger; and

• makes the potential harm from the passengerairbag in a crash greater than the potentialharm from turning off the airbag and allowing thepassenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboardor windshield in a crash.

{CAUTION:

If the passenger’s frontal airbag is turned offfor a person who is not in a risk groupidentified by the national government, thatperson will not have the extra protection of afrontal airbag. In a crash, the frontal airbagwould not be able to inflate and help protectthe person sitting there. Do not turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag unless the personsitting there is in a risk group.

1-49

To turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag, insert yourignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switchto off position.


United States

Canada

1-50

The airbag off light, located on the roof panel abovethe rearview mirror, will come on and stay on to let youknow that the passenger’s frontal airbag is off. SeeAirbag Off Light on page 3-26. The passenger’s frontalairbag will remain off until you turn it back on again.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes onwhen you have turned off the passenger’sfrontal airbag, it means that something may bewrong with the airbag system. The passenger’sfrontal airbag could inflate even though theswitch is off. If this ever happens, do not letanyone whom the national government hasidentified as a member of a passenger airbagrisk group sit in the passenger’s position (forexample, do not secure a rear-facing childrestraint in your vehicle) until you have yourvehicle serviced.

To turn the passenger’s frontal airbag on again, insertyour ignition key into the switch, push in, and movethe switch to the on position.


1-51

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in several placesaround your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manualhave information about servicing your vehicle and theairbag system. To purchase a service manual, seeService Publications Ordering Information on page 7-9.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key isturned off and the battery is disconnected, anairbag can still inflate during improper service.You can be injured if you are close to anairbag when it inflates. Avoid yellowconnectors. They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow properservice procedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If yousee anything that might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a beltis torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The airbag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)

1-52

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraint systemmay not properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death ina crash. To help make sure your restraintsystems are working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be ifworn during a more severe crash, then you neednew parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during a moresevere crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have LATCHsystem, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltor LATCH system was not being used at the time ofthe collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

1-53

✍ NOTES

1-54

Keys ...............................................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5

Doors and Locks .............................................2-7Door Locks ....................................................2-7Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-8Leaving Your Vehicle ......................................2-9Tailgate ........................................................2-9

Windows ........................................................2-10Power Windows ............................................2-11Sun Visors ...................................................2-12

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-12Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-12Passlock® ....................................................2-14

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-14New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-14Ignition Positions ..........................................2-15Starting the Engine .......................................2-16Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-17Parking Brake ..............................................2-19Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-20Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-21Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-22Engine Exhaust ............................................2-22Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-23

Mirrors ...........................................................2-24Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-24Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

HomeLink® ...............................................2-24Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-25Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-25Outside Automatic Dimming Heated Mirror ........2-26

HomeLink ® Transmitter ...................................2-26HomeLink® Wireless Control System ...............2-26HomeLink® Wireless Control

System Operation ......................................2-27Storage Areas ................................................2-31

Glove Box ...................................................2-31Cupholder(s) ................................................2-31Instrument Panel Storage Area .......................2-31Center Console Storage Area .........................2-31Map Pocket .................................................2-31Cargo Cover ................................................2-32Cargo Net System ........................................2-36Side-Saddle Storage .....................................2-37

Convertible Top ..............................................2-37Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-44

Memory Seat ...............................................2-44

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous for many reasons. Theycould operate the power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehicle move. Thechildren or others could be badly injured oreven killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

2-2

One key is used for theignition, the doors and alllocks except the centerconsole.

Center Console Storage Area Key

A separate key is providedfor locking the centerconsole storage area.

If you need a new key, contact your dealer forassistance. In an emergency, contact ChevroletRoadside Assistance. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-5 for more information.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

2-3

Remote Keyless Entry SystemYour keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This isnormal for any remote keyless entry system. If thetransmitter does not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry System Operation onpage 2-5.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.

2-4

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperationYou can lock and unlock your doors and cargo areafrom about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away usingthe remote keyless entry transmitter supplied withyour vehicle.

W (Unlock): When youpress unlock, the driver’sdoor will unlockautomatically, the parkinglamps may flash, thehorn may sound, and theinterior lights will turn on.

If your vehicle has the memory seat feature and youhave previously programmed a seat position, the driver’sseat will move to that position when you press theunlock button. See Memory Seat on page 2-44 formore information.

Q (Lock): Press lock to lock all the doors. Press lockagain within three seconds and the horn will chirp.

F (Cargo Cover Release): To release the cargocover, press the button with this symbol on it. Theconvertible top must be all the way up or down for thisfeature to work properly. The cargo cover can alsobe released using the cargo cover release buttonlocated in the glovebox. See Cargo Cover on page 2-32for more information.

L(Remote Alarm): Press the button with the hornsymbol on it, to sound the horn and make theheadlamps and taillamps flash for up to 30 seconds.This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again,or by waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.

You can program different feedback settings for upto two drivers using the Driver Information Center (DIC).For more information see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 3-41.

2-5

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased through your dealer. Remember to bringany remaining transmitters with you when you go toyour dealer. When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmittersmust also be matched. Once your dealer has coded thenew transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlockyour vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum offour transmitters matched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remote keylessentry transmitter should last about two years.You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’twork at the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it’s probably time to change the battery.The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a RFA #BATTERY LOW message when the transmitter batteryis low. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-45.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care notto touch any of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entrytransmitter do the following:

1. Insert a thin coin in the slot between the covers ofthe transmitter housing. Gently pry the transmitterapart.

2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-voltCR2032 or equivalent battery.

3. Align the covers and snap them together.

4. Check the operation of the transmitter.

2-6

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially children — can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked, thehandle will not open it. You increase thechance of being thrown out of the vehiclein a crash if the doors are not locked. So,wear safety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

From the outside, use your key or the remote keylessentry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation on page 2-5 for more information.

To lock or unlock the driver’s door from the outside withthe key, insert the key and turn it clockwise to lock orcounterclockwise to unlock.

From the inside, use the manual or power door locks.

To lock or unlock either door from the inside, pull up orpush down on the manual lock.

2-7

Power Door Locks

Your power door lockswitch is located on theconsole switchbank.See Center ConsoleSwitchbank on page 3-16for more information.

K (Unlock): Press this symbol to unlock the doorsfrom inside your vehicle.

Q (Lock): Press this symbol to lock the doors frominside your vehicle.

If the key is in the ignition and the driver’s door isopened, the driver’s door will not lock with the powerdoor lock switch.

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle is programmed from the factory toautomatically lock and unlock under certain conditions.If all the doors are closed, when you move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) all of the doors will lock ona vehicle with an automatic transmission or when thevehicle reaches a speed of 8 mph (13 kph) on a vehiclewith a manual transmission. Every time you movethe shift lever back into PARK (P), the doors will unlockfor a vehicle with an automatic transmission or whenthe key is removed from the ignition for a vehicle with amanual transmission. If someone needs to get outwhile you are not in PARK (P) or while the key is in theignition, have that person use the manual or powerlock. When the door is closed again, it will notlock automatically. Use the manual or power lock to lockthe door again.

2-8

Customizing Your Automatic DoorLocks FeatureThe automatic door locks can be programmed to thepreferred settings for up to two drivers. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-52 for more information.

Leaving Your VehicleIf you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open yourdoor and set the lock from inside. Then get out andclose the door.

TailgateTo open the tailgate, do the following:

1. Open the cargo cover using the remote keylessentry transmitter or the cargo cover releasebutton in the glovebox. See Remote Keyless EntrySystem Operation on page 2-5 and Cargo Coveron page 2-32 for more information.

2. Pull up on the handle inside and lower the tailgate.

To close the tailgate, do the following:

1. Close the cargo cover before closing the tailgate.

2. Push the tailgate upward to return it to its upright,latched position. Push and pull on the tailgate tomake sure it is secure.

2-9

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave a child, ahelpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closed in warm orhot weather.

2-10

Power Windows

The driver’s andpassenger’s power windowswitches are located onthe center consoleswitchbank.

See Center Console Switchbank on page 3-16 for moreinformation on location.

When you open a door, the window will automaticallylower about a half inch. When the door is closed,the window will then close. If you wish to re-open thewindow once it’s closed, press and hold the bottomof the power window switch to lower the window. Pressand hold the top of the switch with the up arrow toraise the window.

The ignition must be in ACCESSORY or RUN for thewindow switches to work.

Express Down WindowBoth driver’s and passenger’s window switches havethe express-down feature. Tap the bottom of the driver’sor passenger’s power window switch and immediatelyrelease. The window will lower completely. To stopthe express-down feature from lowering the windowcompletely, simply tap the switch again or press the lockbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5for more information.

To close the window, press and hold the up arrow.

Programming the Power WindowsIf the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,disconnected, or is not working properly, you will needto reprogram the power windows for them to workproperly. Before reprogramming, you will need to replaceor recharge your vehicle’s battery.

To program the windows, follow these steps:

1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY or RUN, closethe doors.

2. Fully lower the windows using the driver’s powerwindow switches. Then raise the windowscompletely.The windows are now programmed.

2-11

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down the sun visors.You can also move them from side to side.

Visor Vanity MirrorOpen the cover on the sun visor to expose thevanity mirror.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorsWith this feature, the lamps come on when you openthe cover.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal. However, there are ways youcan help.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle is equipped with a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

With this system, thesecurity light will flash asyou open the door (ifyour ignition is off).

This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrentsystem. Here’s how to do it:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch orthe remote keyless entry transmitter. The securitylight should come on and stay on.

3. Close all doors. The security light should go offafter approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is notarmed until the security light goes off.

Your vehicle has a feature that allows you to programalarm warning feedback when locking the doorsusing the remote keyless entry transmitter. See “AlarmWarning Type” under DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 3-52, for programing instructions.

2-12

If a locked door is opened with the key, without the key,or without the remote keyless entry transmitter, thealarm will go off. The headlamps and parking lamps willflash for two minutes, and the horn will sound for30 seconds, then will turn off to save the battery power.You can disable the alarm using the remote keylessentry transmitter or by putting the key in the ignition andstarting the vehicle.

Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate ifyou lock the doors with a key or use the manualdoor lock. It activates only if you use a power door lockswitch with the door open, or with the remote keylessentry transmitter. You should also remember thatyou can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key ifthe alarm has been set off.

Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrentsystem, the vehicle should be locked with the doorkey after the doors are closed.

• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remotekeyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way will set off the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any doorwith the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressingunlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Thealarm won’t stop if you try to unlock a door anyother way.

Testing the AlarmThe alarm can be tested by following these steps:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s windowand open the driver’s door.

2. Activate the system by locking the doors with thepower door lock switch while the door is open, orwith the remote keyless entry transmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait forthe security light to go out.

4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the doorwith the manual door lock and open the door. Thisshould set off the alarm.

When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch isnot operational.

If the alarm does not sound when it should but theheadlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 5-82.

If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do notflash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.

2-13

Passlock ®

Your vehicle is equipped with thePasslock® theft-deterrent system.Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder isturned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or theignition lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel systemis disabled and the vehicle will not start.During normal operation, the security light will turn offapproximately five seconds after the key is turnedto RUN. See Security Light on page 3-35.If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, waitabout 10 minutes until the light stops flashing beforetrying to restart the engine. Remember to releasethe key from START as soon as the engine starts.If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicleneeds service.If the engine is running and the security light comes on,you will be able to restart the engine if you turn theengine off. However, your Passlock® system isnot working properly and must be serviced by yourdealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at thistime. You may also want to check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-82. See yourdealer for service.In an emergency, call the GM Roadside AssistanceCenter. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less forthe first 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow, forthe first 500 miles (805 km). Do not makefull-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your newbrake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wearand earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brakelinings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towinga Trailer on page 4-38 for more information.

2-14

Ignition Positions

Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or break thekey. Use the correct key and turn the key only withyour hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. Ifnone of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which you caninsert or remove the key. This position locks the ignitionand transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature.

Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as theradio in the accessory ignition position maydrain the battery and prevent your vehicle fromstarting. Do not operate your vehicle in theaccessory ignition position for a long periodof time.

B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things likethe radio and the windshield wipers when the engineis off.

C (RUN): This is the position for driving.

D (START): This position starts the engine.

2-15

Starting the EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine won’t start in any other position—that’s asafety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when yourvehicle is stopped.

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause your battery tobe drained much sooner. And the excessive heatcan damage your starter motor. At 15 seconds, thestarter will automatically be disengaged. Waitabout 15 seconds between each try to help avoiddraining your battery or damaging your starter.

2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push theaccelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while youhold the ignition key in START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and let up on the acceleratorpedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.

When starting your engine in very cold weather (below0°F or 18 °C), do this:

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START and hold it there up to15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go ofthe key.

2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but thenstops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and holding it there as you hold the key inSTART for about three seconds. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. If thevehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do thesame thing, but this time keep the pedal downfor five or six seconds. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

2-16

Automatic Transmission Operation

Your automatic transmission has a shift lever located onthe center console.There are several different positions for your shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It isthe best position to use when you start your enginebecause your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left the



engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 2-20. If you are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-38.

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before startingthe engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmissionshift lock control system. You have to fully applyyour regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever, andpush the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) (press thebutton in on the console shift lever) as you maintainbrake application. Then move the shift lever intothe gear you wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) onpage 2-21.

2-17

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicleis moving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice or sand without damaging your transmission,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snowon page 4-30.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does notconnect with the wheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very rapidly. You couldlose control and hit people or objects. Do notshift into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine running at high speed may damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is notrunning at high speed when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator all the way down.

You will shift down to the next gear and havemore power.

DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer,carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills or foroff-road driving. Select THIRD (3) when operating thevehicle under any of these conditions.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,however, it offers more power and lower fuel economythan DRIVE (D).

2-18

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power butlower fuel economy than DRIVE (D) and THIRD (3). Youcan use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control yourspeed as you go down steep mountain roads, butthen you would also want to use your brakes off and on.

You can also use SECOND (2) for starting yourvehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more powerbut lower fuel economy than THIRD (3) andSECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or indeep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1)while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmissionwill not shift into first gear until the vehicle is goingslowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using only the acceleratorpedal may damage the transmission. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.Pull the parking brake lever up. If the ignition is on, thebrake system warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 3-28 for moreinformation.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Then push the release button in as you move theparking brake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verify thatthe parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

2-19

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P).

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot andset the parking brake. See Parking Brake onpage 2-19 for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing thebutton on the lever while pushing the lever all theway toward the front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canremove the key from the ignition, the vehicle is inPARK (P).

2-20

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle withthe engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and yourparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. Afteryou’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold downthe regular brake pedal. See if you can move theshift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling ittoward you. If you can, it means that the shift leverwasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift yourtransmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake andthen shift into PARK (P) properly before you leavethe driver’s seat. To find out how, see “ShiftingInto PARK (P)” listed previously in this section.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lockcontrol system You have to fully apply your regularbrake before you can shift from PARK (P) whenthe ignition is in RUN. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-17.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure onthe shift lever, push the shift lever all the way intoPARK (P), and release the shift lever button as youmaintain brake application. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift lever into the gearyou wish.

2-21

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Do notpark over papers, leaves, dry grass or otherthings that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot seeor smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or overroad debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-22

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier caution underEngine Exhaust on page 2-22.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe climate control fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. SeeWinter Driving on page 4-26.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-20.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-38.

2-23

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorThe vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror. Whilesitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust the mirrorso you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip themirror in the center to move it up or down and side toside. The control at the bottom of the mirror is theday/night feature that allows adjustment to the mirror sothat the glare of headlamps from behind is reduced. Pushthe control for daytime use; pull it for night use.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith HomeLink ®

The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearviewmirror with map lamps and HomeLink® Transmitterbuttons. For more information about this feature, seeHomeLink® Wireless Control System on page 2-26.

While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust themirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle.Grip the mirror in the center to move it up or down andside to side.

Mirror OperationThe mirror automatically changes to reduce glare fromheadlamps behind you. A time delay feature preventsrapid changing from the day to night positions whiledriving under lights and through traffic.

[ (On/Off): The automatic dimming feature isautomatically activated when the vehicle is started. Theautomatic dimming feature is turned on or off bypressing this button located on the lower part of themirror. Press and hold the button for up to three secondsto turn this feature on or off.

T (Indicator Light): This light will turn on when theautomatic dimming feature is on.

+ (Map Lamps): Press this button to turn the maplamps on and off.

Press the two outside mirror buttons to light thetransmission positions on the console.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similarmaterial dampened with glass cleaner. Do not sprayglass cleaner directly on the mirror as this could damagethe mirror housing.

2-24

Outside Power Heated MirrorsThe vehicle has outside heated power mirrors.

The power mirrorcontrol is located onthe driver’s door.

To adjust the power mirrors, do the following:

1. Turn the knob toward the mirror to be adjusted.

2. Move the knob in the desired direction.

3. Return the knob to the center position once themirrors are adjusted.

When the furthest position is reached in any direction,the mirror will enter a ratcheting mode and a clickingsound will be heard. To stop this, move the control knobin the opposite direction.

Both mirrors heat to clear them of ice, snow andcondensation when the rear window defogger is turnedon. See “Rear Window Defogger” under ClimateControl System on page 3-18 for more information.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward to preventdamage when going through an automatic car washor confined space. Push each mirror toward the vehicle.To return the mirror to its original position, pushoutward. Be sure to return the mirrors to their originalunfolded position before driving.

Outside Convex MirrorA convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes.

2-25

Outside Automatic DimmingHeated MirrorIf the vehicle has this feature, the driver’s side outsiderearview mirror will adjust for the glare of headlampsfrom behind by pushing the on and off settings on themirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith HomeLink® on page 2-24 for more information.

Both outside mirrors are also heated when therear window defogger is turned on. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Climate Control System on page 3-18.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward to preventdamage when going through an automatic car wash.To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return themirror to its original position, push outward. Be sureto return the mirrors to their original unfolded positionbefore driving.

HomeLink ® Transmitter

HomeLink ® Wireless Control System

If your vehicle has this feature, the HomeLink®

transmitter buttons are located on the automaticdimming rearview mirror. The three buttons on the leftside of the mirror are the HomeLink® transmitter buttons.

HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitterand receiver, provides a way to replace up tothree hand-held transmitters used to activate devicessuch as gate operators, garage door openers, entry doorlocks, security systems and home lighting. AdditionalHomeLink® information can be found on the internet atwww.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

2-26

If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®

Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes and modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorizationto use this equipment.

HomeLink ® Wireless ControlSystem OperationDo not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garagedoor opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”feature. This includes any garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newergarage door opener with rolling codes, please besure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete theprogramming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attempting toprogram the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because ofthe steps involved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles aswell as for future HomeLink® programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®

Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on theInternet at: www.homelink.com or by calling1-800-355-3515.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garagedoor or gate operator you are programming. Whenprogramming a garage door, it is advised to park outsideof the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio frequency.

2-27

Programming HomeLink ®

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off whileprogramming the transmitter. Follow these steps toprogram up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,releasing only when the indicator light begins toflash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down thebuttons for longer than 30 seconds and do notrepeat this step to program a second and/or thirdtransmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®

buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desiredbutton on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitterbutton. Do not release the buttons until Step 4has been completed.Some entry gates and garage door openers mayrequire you to substitute Step 3 with the procedurenoted in “Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives thefrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® button is pressed andreleased.To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of theprogrammed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two secondsand then turns to a constant light, continue withSteps 6 through 8 following to complete theprogramming of a rolling-code equipped device(most commonly, a garage door opener).

2-28

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire is attached to themotor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”button. The name and color of the button mayvary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink® button for two seconds,then release. Repeat the press/hold/releasesequence a second time, and depending on thebrand of the garage door opener (or other rollingcode device), repeat this sequence a third timeto complete the programming.HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-codeequipped device.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You donot want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase allprevious programming.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to “time out” or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long enough forHomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to“time out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator by using the“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless ofwhere you live), replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button whileyou press and release every two seconds (cycle)your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal hasbeen successfully accepted by HomeLink®. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”to complete.

2-29

Using HomeLink ®

Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for atleast half of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Erasing HomeLink ® ButtonsTo erase programming from the three buttons do thefollowing:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons untilthe indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.Do not hold the two outside buttons for longerthan 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and canbe programmed at any time beginning with Step 2under “Programming HomeLink®” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can bereprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink® Button” following this section.

Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink ® ButtonTo program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®

button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Donot release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®

button, proceed with Step 2 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” shown earlier in this section.

Resetting DefaultsTo reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:

1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.

2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®

indicator light turns off.

3. Release both buttons.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at1-800-355-3515, or on the Internet atwww.homelink.com.

2-30

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, pull on the lever. Use your doorkey to lock or unlock it.

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle has one cupholder located on yourinstrument panel and one cupholder that is removableand snaps to the passenger’s side of the center consolein the bracket provided.

To open the cupholder on the instrument panel, push inthe center of the cupholder door. The cupholder willthen release and move outward toward you for use. Toreturn the cupholder to its closed position, push inthe center of the cupholder door near the top. If youpress in the center middle of the cupholder door,the cupholder will not close properly.

Instrument Panel Storage AreaThere is a storage tray located to the right of thesteering wheel on the instrument panel. Press on thetray to release it. The tray will slide out of the instrumentpanel toward you. You can then put small items intothe tray. To close the tray, push forward on the center ofthe tray until it latches back into the instrument panel.

Center Console Storage AreaYour center console has a storage area that can belocked and unlocked with the center console storagekey. See Keys on page 2-2 for more information.

Map PocketThe map/storage pockets are located on both the driverand passenger side doors.

2-31

Cargo Cover

Opening the Cargo Cover

Press this button located inthe glovebox to releasethe cargo cover.

You can also open the cargo cover using the remotekeyless entry transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry System Operation on page 2-5 for moreinformation. The tailgate must be open for you to closethe cargo cover. See Tailgate on page 2-9 for moreinformation.

If you cannot open your cargo cover area using yourremote keyless entry transmitter you should first checkthe battery. See “Battery Replacement” under RemoteKeyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5. Ifchanging the battery does not work, you may need toreplace the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakerson page 5-82 for more information.

To open your cargo cover area manually, do thefollowing:

1. Locate the control box under the rear of the vehicleon the driver’s side, behind the rear tire.

2. Insert the convertible top release tool or yourignition key and turn it to activate the emergencyrelease. The convertible top release tool is providedby the dealer and stored in the glovebox.

Convertible top release tool shown

2-32

Removing the Cargo CoverYour vehicle’s cargo cover can be removed. You willneed more than one person to remove the cargo cover.

1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 2-9 forinstructions.

2. Disconnect theelectrical connectorlocated on theunderside of the cargocover near the frontof the bed.

3. Locate and remove thebolts that hold the cargocover in place. There isone bolt on each sidenear the front of thecargo area.

2-33

4. Slide the cover rearward and then lift up onthe passenger’s side of the cargo cover. Thenhave another person lift the driver’s side of thecargo cover.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall thecargo cover.

Emergency Cargo Cover ReleaseHandle

Notice: Using the emergency cargo cover releasehandle as a tie-down or anchor point when securingitems in the cargo area may damage it. Use theemergency cargo cover release handle only to helpyou open the cargo cover.

Your vehicle has a glow-in-the-dark emergency cargocover release handle located in the cargo area onthe driver’s side of the vehicle. This handle will glowfollowing exposure to light. Pull the release handle up toopen the cargo cover from the inside.

2-34

Cargo Area RailsYour vehicle has side and lower cargo area rails in thecargo area of your vehicle. The cargo area rails canbe used to attach additional storage items such as theside-saddle storage system and cargo net system.See Cargo Net System on page 2-36 and Side-SaddleStorage on page 2-37 for more information.

Cargo Tie Downs

There may be arefour cargo tie downsin the rear cargo area.

Use the cargo tie downs to secure cargo in the cargostorage area.

Cargo Cover Storage SystemYour vehicle may have a cargo cover storage system.To use the cargo area storage system, do the following:

1. Place the storage bag over the cargo cover andsecure the closure before removing any fasteners.

2. Remove the fasteners.3. Install the support bar with the included pins.4. With the assistance of another person, grasp the

handles on the storage bag, slide rearward, and lift.

5. Hang the entire assembly by the included supportbar with the forward edge of the cargo coverpointing up on the pre-installed support brackets.

2-35

Cargo Net SystemYour vehicle may have cargo netting to help keep itemsin your tailgate from moving around.

To use the cargo net system do the following:

1. Assemble the telescoping crossbar by attaching therod to the base.

2. Attach the telescoping crossbar to the upper bedrails in your tailgate by pushing in the base andsliding rearward.

3. Attach the straight side of the cargo tie down intothe telescoping crossbar and the rounded side tothe netting.

4. Arrange the netting and telescoping crossbar intothe pattern to best suit your storage needs.

Be sure to load items in the cargo area according to theproper load limits. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-31 for more information.

2-36

Side-Saddle StorageYour vehicle may have a side-saddle storage system tostore items on either side of the rear cargo area. Formore information on this feature, see your dealer.

Convertible TopRoof TonneauYour vehicle has a roof tonneau that is raised orlowered along with the convertible top using theconvertible top switch located on the center consoleswitchbank. See “Convertible Top Operation” followingin this section for more information.

If you are unable to raise or lower your roof tonneauusing the convertible top switch, verify that thecargo cover is closed. The roof tonneau will not raise orlower if the cargo cover is open. See Cargo Cover onpage 2-32 and for more information. There will also be amessage displayed on the on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-45 for more information on possible DICmessages and how to clear them from the display.

If the cargo area is closed and you still cannot operatethe roof tonneau, check to see if a fuse is blown.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-82 for moreinformation.

Contact your dealer if you are still unable to operate theroof tonneau.

You may need to raise the roof tonneau manually in theevent of a power loss. See “Convertible Top Operation”for instructions.

2-37

Convertible Top Operation

Notice: If you operate the convertible top switchcontinuously while the ignition is in ACCESSORY,the battery will drain and you might not be ableto start your vehicle. Do not use the convertible topswitch for extended periods of time when theignition is in ACCESSORY.

The ignition must be in RUN or ACCESSORY and yourfoot must be on the brake in order to raise or lowerthe convertible top. The cargo cover must also be closedfor the convertible top to work properly.

Operate the convertible top by pressing the convertibletop switch located on the console switchback. SeeCenter Console Switchbank on page 3-16 for moreinformation on location.

{CAUTION:

Moving parts of the convertible top can bedangerous. People can be injured by theconvertible top and its mechanism. Keeppeople away from your vehicle when you arelowering or raising the top.

a (Top Open): Press and hold this symbol onthe convertible top switch to open the convertibletop. The windows will lower automatically when the topbegins to lower. Two chimes will sound when theconvertible top is fully opened.

b (Top Closed): Press and hold this symbol onthe convertible top switch to close the convertibletop. Two chimes will sound when the top is fully closed.

If you cannot raise or lower the convertible top byusing your convertible top switch, you may need toreplace the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakerson page 5-82 for more information.

If you still cannot operate your convertible top, contactyour dealer.

You may need to raise the roof tonneau and convertibletop manually in the event of a power loss. You willneed two people to lift the roof tonneau and convertibletop when using the following procedure. To manuallyraise the roof tonneau and convertible top, do thefollowing:

1. Turn the ignition to OFF.

2. Be sure the cargo cover is closed. See CargoCover on page 2-32 and Remote Keyless EntrySystem Operation on page 2-5 for more information.

3. Open both doors.

2-38

4. In the area behind the seats, locate the two sets ofcables behind the carpet flaps. The cables on thedriver’s side of the vehicle are located behindthe tire inflator kit. The tire inflator kit must beremoved to access the cables. See Tire Inflator Kiton page 5-66 for instructions on how to removethe tire inflator kit.

5. Locate the loops at the ends of the cables.One has a red band on it, and the other hasa green band.The cable with the green band opens the tonneaulatch, and the cable with the red band closes it.

6. Using the release tool from the convertible top,hook the tool into the green loop.The convertible top release tool is provided whenyou purchase your new SSR from the dealer.It is stored in the glovebox.

7. Pull the green cable with the release tool upward ata 45 degree angle until the cable is pulled tight andthe roof tonneau latch is released.

8. Repeat Steps 4 through 7 on the other side ofthe vehicle.

2-39

9. You will know the latches have been released whenthe roof tonneau can be raised. If you cannot raisethe roof tonneau, repeat Steps 4 through 7 onboth sides of the vehicle until the roof tonneau canbe raised.

10. Lift up on the roof tonneau and raise it to theupright position.

11. Grasp the front panel of the convertible top andpull up.You will need more than one person to do this.One person working on each side of the vehicleis best.

2-40

12. Insert the front panel into the roof latches.One person should hold the convertible top in theclosed position by pushing it up in the rear,while another person performs the next steps.

13. Remove the plastic caplocated between thesun visors. Turnthe cap in eitherdirection about aquarter of a turn, thenpull downward toremove it.

14. Slide the tool side ofthe convertible toprelease tool untilthe entire tool formsa right angleas shown.

Driver’s side roof latch shown, passenger’sside similar

2-41

15. Insert the convertible top release tool into the latchclosing mechanism between the sun visors and turnit counterclockwise until the roof latches aresecured and the convertible top is fully closed.Then replace the plastic cap.

16. From the upright position, push down on the outerarea of the boot cover panel where the hinges andhydraulic cylinders are located to separate itfrom the roof tonneau. Then, continue to push theboot cover panel down as far as it will go.

2-42

17. Push down the roof tonneau cover. Be sure theboot cover clears the rear roof panel.

18. Latch the tonneau panel. Pull the red cable with therelease tool until the cable is pulled tight and theroof tonneau latch engages.

19. Repeat Step 18 on the other side of the vehicle.

20. You will know the latches are engaged if theroof tonneau cannot be raised. If the roof tonneaucan be raised, repeat Step 18 on both sides ofthe vehicle until the roof tonneau cannot be raised.

21. Once the roof tonneau is closed, adjust the cableslocated behind the seats. Pull the cable with the redband until both cables are the same length.Repeat this step on the other side of the vehicle.

22. Check the roof tonneau to make sure it is securebefore driving.Boot cover panel down, roof tonneau up

2-43

Vehicle Personalization

Memory Seat

Your vehicle may have a memory driver’s seat. Thecontrols are located on the outboard of the driver’s seat,and are used to program and recall memory settingsfor the driver’s seating positions.

Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired position. Pressthe SET button, then press and hold button 1 (forDriver 1) for three seconds. A double chime will soundto let you know that the position has been stored.

A second seating position can be programmed byrepeating the procedure with a second driver andpressing button 2 for three seconds. Each timebutton 1 or 2 is pressed and released while the vehicleis in PARK (P), a single chime will sound, and thememory position will be recalled.

If you use the unlock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter to enter your vehicle, the preset driver’sseat positions will be recalled if programmed to do sothrough the Driver Information Center (DIC). Thenumbers on the back of the transmitters, 1 or 2,correspond to the numbers on the memory controls.

The seat positions can also be recalled by placing thekey in the ignition if programmed to do so throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

To stop recall movement of the memory feature atany time, press one of the power seat controls ormemory buttons.

Further programming for automatic seat can be donethrough the Driver Information Center (DIC). SeeDIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52 for moreinformation.

2-44

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-3Other Warning Devices ...................................3-4Horn .............................................................3-4Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-4Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-5Exterior Lamps .............................................3-11Interior Lamps ..............................................3-14Center Console Switchbank ............................3-16Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-16Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-17

Climate Controls ............................................3-18Climate Control System .................................3-18Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-21

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-22Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-23Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-24Trip Odometer ..............................................3-24Tachometer .................................................3-24Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-24Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-25Airbag Off Light ............................................3-26Charging System Light ..................................3-27Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-28Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-29Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light

(Automatic Transmission) ............................3-29

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-30Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-30Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-34Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-35Security Light ...............................................3-35Cruise Control Light ......................................3-35Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-36Highbeam On Light .......................................3-36Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-36Fuel Gage ...................................................3-37Auxiliary Gage Package .................................3-38

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-41DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-41DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-45DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-52

Audio System(s) .............................................3-58Setting the Time ...........................................3-59Radio with CD ..............................................3-59Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-68Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-80Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-80Radio Reception ...........................................3-81Care of Your CDs .........................................3-81Care of the CD Player ...................................3-81Integrated Windshield Antenna ........................3-81

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Instrument Panel Overview

3-2

A. Climate Control Vents. See Climate Control Systemon page 3-18.

B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 3-23.

C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.

D. Exterior and Interior Lamps Control. See ExteriorLamps on page 3-11 and Interior Lamps onpage 3-14.

E. Driver Information Center (DIC) buttons. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 3-41.

F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio SteeringWheel Controls on page 3-80.

G. Storage Tray. See Instrument Panel Storage Areaon page 2-31.

H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-58.I. Climate Control System. See Climate Control

System on page 3-18.J. Transmission Shift Lever. See Automatic

Transmission Operation on page 2-17.K. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-31.L. Glovebox. See Glove Box on page 2-31.

Hazard Warning Flashers

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

3-3

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedon the top of thesteering column.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. Press the button again toturn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turnsignals won’t work. The flashers will stop if you step onthe brake.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behindyour vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the horn symbol on thesteering wheel pad.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel beforeyou drive. You can raise it to the highest level to allowmore room for the driver to enter and exit the vehicle.

The tilt lever is located onthe driver’s side of thesteering column, under theturn signal lever.

To tilt, hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt levertoward you. Move the wheel to a comfortable level, thenrelease the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place.

3-4

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane Change Signals

• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

• Flash-to-Pass Feature

• N Windshield Wipers

• JQ Windshield Washer

• I Cruise Control

Turn and Lane Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) and twodownward (for left) positions. These positions allow youto signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever will returnautomatically.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will return byitself when you release it. The bottom of the outsiderearview mirrors may also be equipped with lane changeindicators.

3-5

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrowsflash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb maybe burned out and other drivers won’t see yourturn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signala turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakerson page 5-82 and for burned-out bulbs.

If you have a trailer towing option with added wiringfor the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasheris used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicatorwill flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out.Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly tomake sure they are working.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of theturn signal. You will also receive a DIC message.See “Turn Signal On” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-45 for more information.To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever tothe off position.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low to high beam, pushthe lever toward the instrument panel. To return tolow-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever towardyou. Then release it.

When the high beams areon, this indicator light onthe instrument panelcluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps tosignal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.It works even if your headlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, thenrelease it.

If your headlamps are in the automatic position or onlow beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.The high-beam indicator on the instrument panelcluster will come on. Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

3-6

Windshield Wipers

N (Windshield Wipers): To use the windshieldwipers, turn the band with the wiper symbol on it.

8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band tomist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you wantmore wipes, hold the band on mist longer.

Delayed Wipers: You can set the wiper speed for along or short delay between wipes. This can bevery useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to one ofthe dashed marks on the lever to choose the delaytime. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorterthe delay.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,turn the band away from you to the first solid band pastthe delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn theband further, to the second solid band past thedelay settings.

9(Off): Turn the band to this symbol to turn of yourwindshield wipers.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

LQ(Windshield Washer): To spray washer fluid onthe windshield, press the paddle. The wipers willclear the window and then either stop or return to yourpreset speed.

3-7

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your footon the accelerator. This can really help on longtrips. Cruise control does not work at speeds belowabout 25 mph (40 km/h).

If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where youcannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, donot use your cruise control on winding roadsor in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slipperyroads. On such roads, fast changes in tiretraction can cause needless wheel spinning,and you could lose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when youare not using cruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and even lose control.Keep the cruise control switch off until youwant to use cruise control.

Setting Cruise ControlYour cruise control islocated at the end of yourturn signal/multifunctionlever.

3-8

R (On): Move the switch to this position to turn thecruise control system on.

S (Resume/Accelerate): Move the switch to thisposition to resume a set speed or to accelerate.

T (Set): Press this button, located at the end ofthe lever, to set a speed.

9 (Off): This position turns the cruise controlsystem off and cancels memory of a set speed.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press in the set button at the end of the leverand release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.The accelerator pedal will not go down.

The Cruise light on theinstrument panel clusterwill illuminate whenthe cruise control isengaged.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desired speedand then you apply the brake. This, of course, shutsoff the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on toresume/accelerate.

You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed andstay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate, the vehiclewill keep going faster until you release the switch orapply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,don’t hold the switch at resume/accelerate.

3-9

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the button at the end of the lever,then release the button and the accelerator pedal.You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.

• Move the cruise switch from on toresume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up tothe speed you want, and then release the switch.To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControl• Press and hold the button at the end of the lever

until you reach the lower speed you want, thenrelease it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly pressand release the set button. Each time you do this,you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle willslow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hills dependsupon your speed, load and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, you may want tostep on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift toa lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,applying the brake takes you out of cruise control.Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’tuse cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to turn off the cruise control:• Step lightly on the brake pedal.• Move the cruise switch to off, or• Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

3-10

Exterior Lamps

O(Exterior and Interior Lamps Controls): Thesecontrols (B) are located to the left of the steering wheeland are used to operate the exterior and interiorlamps. Information on the exterior lamps follows.

D (Interior Lamps Control): The interior lamp control(A) is used to adjust the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights. For more information on interior lamps,see Interior Lamps on page 3-14.

The exterior lamps control operates the followingsystems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Lamps

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Interior Courtesy Lamps

O (Fog Lamp Indicator Light): This light illuminateswhen the fog lamps are turned on. See “Fog Lamps”later in this section for more information.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Turning theexterior lamps control to this position activates theautomatic headlamp system. See “Automatic HeadlampSystem” following in this section for more information.

;(Parking Lamps): Turning the exterior lampscontrol to this position turns on the parking lamps,license plate lamps, the sidemarker lamps andthe instrument panel lights.

2(Headlamps): Turning the exterior lamps control tothis position turns on the headlamps, together withthe previously listed lamps and lights.

3-11

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, your automaticheadlamp system will turn on your headlamps at thenormal brightness along with other lamps such asthe taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and theinstrument panel lights when the exterior lamps knob isturned to AUTO. The radio lights will also be on.

Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the topof the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered orthe system will be on whenever the ignition is on.

The system may also turn on your lights when drivingthrough a parking garage, heavy overcast weatheror a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transition between the daytimeand nighttime operation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems sothat driving under bridges or bright overhead streetlights does not affect the system. The DRL andautomatic headlamp system will only be affected whenthe light sensor sees a change in lighting lastinglonger than the delay.

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlampsystem off, set the parking brake while the ignition is off.Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlampsystem will stay off until you release the parking brake,or until you shift out of PARK (P).

You may be able to turn off your automatic headlampsystem. See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” laterin this section for more information.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automaticheadlamp system will come on immediately. Onceyou leave the garage, it will take approximatelyone minute for the automatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,your instrument panel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in the full bright position. See “InstrumentPanel Brightness” under Interior Lamps on page 3-14.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

Lamps On ReminderA reminder tone will sound when your headlamps orparking lamps are manually turned on, the driver’s door isopen and your ignition is in OFF or ACCESSORY. To turnthe tone off, turn the knob all the way counterclockwise.In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once theignition key is in OFF.

3-12

Daytime Running LampsDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in the shortperiods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functionaldaytime running lamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make your headlamps come onat reduced brightness when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps knob is in AUTO.

• The light sensor detects daytime light.

• The transmission is not in PARK (P).

When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’tbe on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.

When it begins to get dark, the headlamps willautomatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, put your vehicle’stransmission in PARK (P). The DRL will stay off untilyou shift out of PARK (P).

Fog LampsUse your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or mistyconditions. Your ignition must be in RUN for yourfog lamps to work.

-(Fog Lamps): Press this button located on theexterior lamps control to turn the fog lamps on or off.The fog lamps will go off whenever you turn on thehigh-beam headlamps. When the high beams are turnedoff, the fog lamps will come on again.

O (Fog Lamp Indicator Light): This light located onthe exterior lamps control illuminates when thefog lamps are turned on.

3-13

Interior Lamps

Instrument Panel Brightness

O(Exterior and Interior Lamp Controls): Thesecontrols (B) are used to operate the exterior and interiorlamps. Information on the interior lamps follows.For more information on the exterior lamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 3-11.

D (Interior Lamp Control): The interior lampcontrol (A) is located to the left of the steering wheeland is used to adjust the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights.

Press lightly on the interior lamp control and release.The control will extend outward. Turn the controlclockwise to brighten and counterclockwise to dim theinstrument panel lights. Press on the control to return it tothe stored position.

Exit LightingWith the exit lighting, the interior lamps will come onwhen you remove the key from the ignition to help yousee while exiting the vehicle.

3-14

Parade DimmingThis feature prohibits the dimming of your instrumentpanel displays during daylight while your headlampsare on. When the light sensor reads darkness outside,you will be able to dim your instrument panel displaysonce again.

Perimeter LightingWhen the button with the unlock symbol on the remotekeyless entry transmitter is pressed, the DRL, parkinglamps and back-up lamps will come on if it is darkenough outside.

This feature can be personalized for up to two drivers.See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-52 formore information.

Front Map LampsIf your vehicle has front map lamps, they are located onthe inside rearview mirror. They will automaticallycome on for about 40 seconds when the doors areunlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter oruntil the ignition key is turned to RUN or ACCESSORY.The lamps will also stay on for about 40 secondsafter you exit the vehicle unless you lock the doors withthe remote keyless entry transmitter.

You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing thebutton near each lamp.

Battery Rundown ProtectionThis feature shuts off all lamps that are left on for morethan 10 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keepyour battery from running down.

3-15

Center Console SwitchbankThe following controls are located on your centerconsole switchbank:

A. Driver Power Window. See Power Windows onpage 2-11.

B. Traction Control System (TCS) (AutomaticTransmission Only). See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 4-8.

C. Convertible Top. See Convertible Top on page 2-37.D. Power Door Locks. See Power Door Locks on

page 2-8.E. Passenger Power Window. See Power Windows

on page 2-11.

Accessory Power OutletsWith accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliaryelectrical equipment such as a cellular telephone orCB radio.

There is an accessory power outlet located on either sideof the ashtray on the instrument panel, and there is anoutlet in the rear cargo area. A small cap must beremoved to access an accessory power outlet. When notusing an outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Always turnoff electrical equipment when not in use and donot plug in equipment that exceeds the maximumamperage rating.

Automatic Transmission shown,Manual Transmission similar

3-16

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatiblewith the accessory power outlet and could resultin blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem, see your dealer for additional informationon accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to yourvehicle may damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperage rating. Check withyour dealer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theproper installation instructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by your warranty. Do nothang any type of accessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the power outlets aredesigned for accessory power plugs only.

Ashtrays and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle has an ashtray and cigarette lighter.

To access, push the upper edge of the center instrumentpanel door until it clicks and then release. The doorwill open to expose the ashtray and cigarette lighter.

Press the lighter all the way in and release it. It will popback out by itself once the element has heated for use.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammableitems in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignite them and possiblydamage your vehicle. Never put flammable items inthe ashtray.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to back away fromthe heating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating may occur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating.

3-17

Climate Controls

Climate Control System

A. Temperature KnobB. Fan KnobC. Mode Knob

With this system you can control the heating, cooling,and ventilation for your vehicle.

Temperature KnobThe left knob on the control panel is used to adjust thetemperature of the air in the vehicle. Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decreasethe temperature.

#(Air Conditioning): Press this button located on thetemperature knob to turn the air-conditioning system onor off. An indicator light on the button will come on to letyou know the air conditioning is activated. When thesystem is on, this setting cools and dehumidifies the airentering your vehicle and directs it through the floor ductsas well as the instrument panel outlets.

The air conditioning system removes moisture from theair, so you may sometimes notice a small amount ofwater dripping underneath your vehicle while idlingor after turning off the engine. This is normal.

The air conditioning will not function if the fan isturned off.

3-18

Fan KnobThe center knob on the control panel is used to controlthe fan speed. Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.

? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside airfrom coming in the vehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from entering your vehicle or helpheat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.Press this button on the fan knob to turn the recirculationmode on or off. An indicator light on the button willcome on to let you know the recirculation modeis activated.

Recirculation is only available in the bi-level and ventmodes. If you push the recirculation button whilethe system is in any other mode, the light on the buttonwill flash to indicate that recirculation is not available.

Mode KnobThe right knob on the control panel is used to direct theairflow inside your vehicle. Turn the knob to selectone of the following modes:

H (Vent): Select this mode to direct air to theinstrument panel outlets.

)(Bi-Level): Select this mode to direct approximatelyhalf of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and theremaining air to the floor outlets and the defrosterand side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to theupper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Select this mode to direct air to the flooroutlets. Recirculation does not work in this mode.

3-19

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass.This can be minimized if the climate control system isused properly. There are two modes to clear fog orfrost from your windshield and side windows. Use thedefog mode to clear the windows of fog or moistureand warm the passengers. Use the defrost modeto remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.For best results, clear all snow and ice from thewindshield before defrosting.

/(Floor/Defog): This mode directs half of the air tothe windshield and the side window outlets and the otherhalf to the floor outlets. When you select this mode,the system runs the air-conditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is at or below freezing.Recirculation is not available in this mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to thewindshield, with some air directed to the side windowoutlets and the floor outlets. When you select this mode,the system runs the air-conditioning compressorunless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.Recirculation is not available in this mode.

1 (Maximum Defrost): This mode directs most ofthe air to the windshield, with some air directed tothe side window outlets and the floor outlets. The rearwindow defogger and heated outside mirrors will turn on,and the fan speed will be at the highest setting (5).The temperature will be at the hottest setting also.Recirculation is not available in this mode.

If this mode was selected when you turn your vehicleoff, the warmest temperature and highest fan speed willbe restored when the vehicle is started, regardless ofthe temperature and fan setting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

3-20

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is on.

= (Rear): Press this button on the right knob to turnthe rear window defogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button will come on to let you know that the rearwindow defogger is activated.

When the rear defogger button is pressed, the outsideheated mirrors will warm to help clear any fog orfrost from the surface of the mirrors.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window may damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rearwindow with sharp objects.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the levers located inthe center of each outletto change the directionof the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside of your vehicle moreeffectively.

3-21

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages thatmay be on your vehicle. The pictures will help youlocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention toyour warning lights and gages could also save youor others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As youwill see in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start the enginejust to let you know they’re working. If you are familiarwith this section, you should not be alarmed whenthis happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together to let you know whenthere’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stayson when you are driving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem, check the sectionthat tells you what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly,and even dangerous. So please get to know yourwarning lights and gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)that works along with the warning lights and gages.See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-41 formore information.

3-22

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know howfast you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safelyand economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

3-23

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speed in both milesper hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far your vehicle has beendriven, in either miles (used in the United States)or kilometers (used in Canada).

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Turn the ignition to RUN and press thetrip information button located on the steering wheel.See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-41 for moreinformation.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs anew odometer installed. If the new one can be set tothe mileage total of the old odometer, then it mustbe. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label mustbe put on the driver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle hasbeen driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.

Your trip odometer is part of your Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The trip information button togglesto display your trip odometer, Trip A, and Trip Bfunctions. See “Trip Odometer” under DIC Controlsand Displays on page 3-41 for more information.

TachometerNotice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehiclecould be damaged, and the damages would not becovered by your warranty. Do not operate the enginewith the tachometer in the shaded warning area.

The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Fuel will shut off at about 6500 rpm. It will turn back onagain once the vehicle rpm drops below 6500.

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime willcome on for several seconds to remind people tofasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stay onfor several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chimenor the light will come on.

3-24

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an air bag readiness light on the instrumentpanel cluster, which shows the air bag symbol.The system checks the air bag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. The system check includes the air bagsensors, the air bag modules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module. For more informationon the air bag system, see Airbag Systems onpage 1-40.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flash fora few seconds. Then thelight should go out.This means the systemis ready.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle, it means the airbag systemmay not be working properly. The airbags inyour vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle serviced right away if the airbagreadiness light stays on after you start yourvehicle.

The air bag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If thelight doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-25

Airbag Off LightWhen you turn the passenger’s frontal air bag off,the air bag off light, located on the roof panel above therearview mirror, will come on and stay on to remindyou that the air bag has been turned off. This light willgo off when you turn the passenger’s frontal air bagback on again. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-48 formore on this, including important safety information.

{CAUTION:

If the passenger’s frontal airbag is turned offfor a person who is not in a risk groupidentified by the national government, thatperson will not have the extra protection of afrontal airbag. In a crash, the airbag would notbe able to inflate and help protect the personsitting there. Do not turn off the passenger’sfrontal airbag unless the person sitting thereis in a risk group. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 1-48 for more on this, including importantsafety information.

3-26

{CAUTION:


Charging System Light

The charging system lightwill come on briefly whenyou turn on the ignition,but the engine is notrunning, as a check toshow you it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If it stayson, or comes on while you are driving, you may have aproblem with the charging system. It could indicatethat you have problems with a generator drive belt, oranother electrical problem. Have it checked rightaway. Driving while this light is on could drain yourbattery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as theradio and air conditioner.

3-27

Brake System Warning LightWhen the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill come on when you set your parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 2-19 for more information.The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’trelease fully. If it stays on after your parking brake isfully released, it means you have a brake problem.

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other partcan still work and stop you. For good braking, though,you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there could be a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspected right away.

This light should come on briefly when you turn theignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off theroad and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal isharder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,have the vehicle towed for service. See TowingYour Vehicle on page 4-30.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning light ison. Driving with the brake system warning lighton can lead to an accident. If the light is stillon after you have pulled off the road andstopped carefully, have the vehicle towed forservice.


3-28

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the anti-lock brakesystem, this light will comeon when you start yourengine and may stay onfor several seconds.That’s normal.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake systemwarning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but youdon’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake systemwarning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lockbrakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28.

The anti-lock brake system warning light should comeon briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light(Automatic Transmission)

If the TC (traction control)warning light comes onand stays on, there may bea problem with thetraction control system.

The TC (traction control) warning light will come onbriefly when you turn the ignition to ON. If it doesn’tcome on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

If the Traction Control System (TCS) is on and you drivefaster than 100 mph (161 km/h), the system will turnoff and the TC warning light will come on. The TCS willturn back on and the TC warning light will go outonce the vehicle speed falls below 90 mph (145 km/h).

If the TC (traction control) warning light stays on orcomes on while you are driving, pull off the road as soonas possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the systemby turning the ignition off then back on. If the lightstill stays on or comes back on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. Have the tractioncontrol system inspected as soon as possible.

3-29

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If thegage pointer is near 260 °F (125 °C), the engine istoo hot.

It means that your engine coolant has overheated.If you have been operating your vehicle under normaldriving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop yourvehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-27 for moreinformation.

Malfunction Indicator LampCheck Engine Light

Your vehicle is equippedwith a computer whichmonitors operation of thefuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels for thelife of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The check engine light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service is required.Malfunctions often will be indicated by the systembefore any problem is apparent. This may prevent moreserious damage to your vehicle. This system is alsodesigned to assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.


3-30

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with thislight on, after awhile, your emission controls may notwork as well, your fuel economy may not be as good,and your engine may not run as smoothly. This couldlead to costly repairs that may not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofyour vehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and may cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. This mayalso result in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it isworking, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light does not come on, have itrepaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control system onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service may be required.

3-31

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restartthe engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If theLight Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps, and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install thecap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allowfuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

3-32

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality willcause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause thelight to turn on.If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has theproper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problems that may havedeveloped.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormay begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the checkengine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happenif you have recently replaced your battery or if yourbattery has run down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this and your vehiclestill does not pass the inspection for lack of OBDsystem readiness, your GM dealer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.

3-33

Oil Pressure Gage

The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressurein psi (pounds per square inch) when the engineis running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure inkPa (kilopascals).

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.If you do, your engine can become so hot thatit catches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.

Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outsidetemperature and oil viscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.

A reading in the low pressure zone may be causedby a low oil level or other oil-related problems.See your dealer for service immediately.


3-34

Change Engine Oil LightThis light is displayedwhen the engine oil needsto be changed.

Once the engine oil has been changed, the light mustbe reset. Until it is reset, the light will be displayed whenthe engine is on. For more information on resettingthe system, see “When to Change Engine Oil (GM OilLife System)” under Engine Oil on page 5-14.

Security LightThis light will come onbriefly when you turn thekey to START. Thelight will stay on until theengine starts.

If the light flashes, the Passlock® system has entered atamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®

on page 2-14.

If the light comes on continuously while driving andstays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®

system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,and you should see your dealer.

Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-12 foradditional information regarding the security light.

Cruise Control LightThis symbol appears onyour instrument panelwhenever you setyour cruise control. See“Cruise Control” underTurn Signal/MultifunctionLever on page 3-5.

3-35

Reduced Engine Power LightThis light is displayedwhen a noticeablereduction in the vehicle’sperformance may occur.

The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed whenthe reduced engine power light is on but accelerationand speed may be reduced. The performance maybe reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.If this light stays on, see your dealer as soon as possiblefor diagnosis and repair.

This light may also come on if there is a problem with theThrottle Actuator Control (TAC) system. If this happens,take the vehicle in for service as soon as possible.

Highbeam On LightThis light comes onwhenever the high-beamheadlamps are on.

Check Gages Warning LightThe Check Gages light willcome on briefly when youare starting the engine.

If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,check your coolant temperature and engine oilpressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones.See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-30and Oil Pressure Gage on page 3-34.

When the fuel level is low in your vehicle, the checkgages light will come on and a chime will sound. You willalso see a FUEL LEVEL LOW message on the DIC.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-45for more information.

3-36

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you abouthow much fuel you have remaining.

A chime will sound and the check gages warning lightwill come on when your fuel level is low. FUEL LEVELLOW will appear on the DIC display. See CheckGages Warning Light on page 3-36, “Fuel Range” underDIC Controls and Displays on page 3-41, and DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-45 for moreinformation.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before thegage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than thegage indicated. For example, the gage may haveindicated the tank was half full, but it actually took alittle more or less than half the tank’s capacity tofill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner orspeed up.

• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turnoff the ignition.


3-37

Auxiliary Gage Package

A. Voltmeter GageB. Instantaneous Fuel Consumption GageC. Transmission Temperature Gage

Your vehicle may have an auxiliary gage packagelocated at the front of the center console.

Voltmeter Gage

This gage (A) is located onthe left side of the gagepackage.

When your engine is not running, but the ignition is inRUN, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge inDC volts.

When the ignition is on and the engine is running, thegage shows the condition of the charging system.Readings between the low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.

3-38

Readings in the low warning zone may occur when alarge number of electrical accessories are operating inthe vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for anextended period. This condition is normal since thecharging system is not able to provide full powerat engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself as higher engine speedsallow the charging system to create maximum power.

You can only drive for a short time with the readingin either warning zone. If you must drive while the gageis in the warning zone, turn off all unnecessaryaccessories.

Readings in either warning zone indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible.

Instantaneous Fuel Consumption Gage

This gage (B) is located inthe center of the gagepackage.

The instantaneous fuel consumption gage shows therate of fuel that is being used in gallons per hour (gph).

3-39

Transmission Temperature GageThis gage (C) is located onthe right side of the gagepackage.

When your ignition is on, the gage shows the temperatureof the transmission fluid. The normal operating range isfrom 100°F (38°C) to about 265°F (130°C).

At approximately 265°F (130°C), the transmission willenter a transmission protection mode. When thetransmission enters the protection mode, you maynotice a change in the transmission shifting patterns.The transmission will return to normal shifting patternswhen the transmission fluid temperature falls below260°F (127°C).

Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to do so.Set the parking brake, place the transmission inPARK (P) and allow the engine to idle until thetransmission temperature falls below 260°F (127°C).

If the transmission continues to operate above 260°F(127°C), see your dealer for service or contact GMRoadside Assistance. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-5.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle with thetransmission temperature gage above normaloperating range, you can damage the transmission.This could lead to costly repairs that would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not drive yourvehicle while the transmission temperature gagereading is above normal. See your dealer for service.

The following situations can cause the transmission tooperate at higher temperatures:

• Towing a trailer

• Hot outside air temperatures

• Hauling a large or heavy load

• Low transmission fluid level

• High transmission fluid level

• Engine overheating

A temporary solution to hotter transmission operatingtemperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.If the transmission is operated at higher temperatureson a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-5 for the proper transmission maintenanceintervals.

3-40

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you thestatus of many of your vehicle’s systems. It is alsoused to display driver personalization features andwarning/status messages. The DIC display is locatedon the instrument panel cluster. The DIC buttonsare located on the steering wheel.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a shortdelay the DIC will display the current driver and theinformation that was last displayed before the enginewas turned off.

If a problem is detected, a warning message will appearon the display. Be sure to take any message thatappears on the display seriously and remember thatclearing the message will only make the messagedisappear, not correct the problem.

DIC Controls and DisplaysThe DIC has different modes which can be accessed bypressing the four buttons located on the steering wheel.The button functions are listed in the following pages.

A. 3 (Trip Information) : Press this button todisplay the odometer, trip odometer, and the timer.

B. r (Fuel Information) : Press this button todisplay the current fuel and engine oil information.

C. q (Personalization) : Press this button to accessthe vehicle personalization menu and customize thepersonalization settings on your vehicle.

D. r (Select) : Press this button to reset certain DICfunctions, acknowledge DIC warning messagesand clear them from the DIC, and set yourpersonalization settings.

3-41

Trip Information

3 (Trip Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the odometer, TRIP A, TRIP B, and TIMER.

OdometerPress the trip information button until the odometerappears on the display. This shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers.

Trip OdometerPress the trip information button until TRIP A or TRIP Bis displayed. This shows the current distance traveledsince the last reset for each trip odometer in either milesor kilometers. Both odometers can be used at thesame time.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately bypressing and holding the select button while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

TimerThe DIC can be used as a stopwatch. Press the tripinformation button until TIMER is displayed. Press theselect button to start the timer. The display will showthe amount of time that has passed since the timerwas last reset (not including time the ignition isoff). Time will continue to be counted as long as theignition is on, even if another display is being shown onthe DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which thedisplay will roll back to zero.

To stop the counting of time, press the select buttonbriefly while TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the selectbutton while TIMER is displayed.

3-42

Fuel Information

r (Fuel Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the range, average fuel economy, instant fueleconomy and engine oil life.

Fuel RangePress the fuel information button until RANGE appearsto display the remaining distance you can drivewithout refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and thefuel remaining in the tank. The display will showFUEL LEVEL LOW if the fuel level is low and a chimewill sound. The check gages warning light on theinstrument panel cluster will also be illuminated.See Check Gages Warning Light on page 3-36 for moreinformation.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuel rangeis an average of recent driving conditions. As yourdriving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Fuel EconomyPress the fuel information button until AVG. ECONappears in the display. Average fuel economy is howmany miles per gallon your vehicle is getting based oncurrent and past driving conditions.

Press and hold the select button while AVG. ECON isdisplayed to reset the average fuel economy. Averagefuel economy will then be calculated starting fromthat point. If the average fuel economy is not reset,it will be continually updated each time you drive.

Instant Fuel EconomyPress the fuel information button until INST. ECONappears in the display. Instant fuel economy ishow many miles per gallon your vehicle is at theparticular moment in time. The instant fuel economycannot be reset.

3-43

Engine Oil LifePress the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFEappears in the display. The GM Oil Life System™shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life.It will show 100% when the system is reset afteran oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on aschedule consistent with your driving conditions.

Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change.To reset the engine oil life system, press and hold theselect button while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed.

The engine oil life reading in the DIC does not replacethe need to maintain your vehicle as recommendedin the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See EngineOil on page 5-14, Change Engine Oil Light onpage 3-35, and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5.

Personalizationq (Personalization): Press this button to accessthe vehicle personalization menu and customizethe personalization settings on your vehicle. See DICVehicle Personalization on page 3-52 for moreinformation.

Select

r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DICfunctions, acknowledge DIC warning messagesand clear them from the DIC, and set yourpersonalization settings.

3-44

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driverthat the status of the vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by the driver to correct thecondition. Multiple messages may appear one afteranother. Some messages may not require immediateaction but you should press the select button toacknowledge that you received the message and clear itfrom the display. Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the display because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can be removedfrom the DIC display. The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayed and some informationabout them.

Battery Not ChargingIf the battery is not charging during operation, thismessage will appear on the DIC. The charging systemlight may also be displayed on the instrument panelcluster. See Charging System Light on page 3-27for more information. Driving your vehicle when thebattery is not charging properly can drain the battery.Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible.Press the select button to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display.

Battery Voltage Too HighThis message will be displayed when the batteryvoltage is higher than normal and you try to raise orlower the convertible top. The charging system light mayalso be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.See Charging System Light on page 3-27 for moreinformation. Press the select button to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the DIC display.

Battery Voltage Too LowThis message will be displayed when the batteryvoltage is lower than normal and you try to raise orlower the convertible top. The charging system light mayalso be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.See Charging System Light on page 3-27 for moreinformation. Press the select button to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the DIC display.

Cargo Cover AjarThis message will be displayed when trying to open orclose the convertible top while the cargo cover isopen. Make sure the cargo cover is fully closedbefore trying to open or close the convertible top.This message will clear itself from the DIC once thecargo cover is closed.

3-45

Change Trans (Transmission) FluidIf your transmission fluid in your vehicle needs to bechanged, this message will appear on the DIC.See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-21and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5 for moreinformation.

Check Oil LevelIf the oil level in the vehicle is low this message willappear on the DIC. Check the oil level and add oil asnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for moreinformation. Press the select button to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display.

Depress BrakeThis message will be displayed on the DIC when youtry to raise or lower the convertible top without firstpressing the brake pedal. The brake pedal mustbe pressed in order to operate the convertible top.See Convertible Top on page 2-37 for more information.Pressing the brake pedal will clear the message, oryou can press the select button to acknowledgeand clear the message from the DIC display.

Driver Door AjarThis message will be displayed on the DIC when thedriver’s door was not closed completely. A chimewill sound. Stop the vehicle, check the door forobstacles, and close the door again. Fully closing thedriver’s door will clear this message from the display, oryou can press the select button to acknowledge themessage and clear it from the DIC display.

Engine Coolant Hot Idle Engine

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

If the cooling system temperature becomes too hot, thismessage will appear in the DIC and you will hear achime. Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle inPARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach a safetemperature. You may need to add more coolant to yourvehicle before driving again. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-24 and Engine Coolant Temperature Gageon page 3-30 for more information. This message willclear from the DIC display when the coolant temperaturedrops to a safe operating temperature.

3-46

Engine Overheated Stop Engine


If your engine is overheated, this message will bedisplayed on the DIC. Stop the vehicle as soon aspossible and do not drive it until the engine cools down.You may need to add more coolant to your vehiclebefore driving again. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-27 and Engine Coolant Temperature Gage onpage 3-30 for more information. This message will clearfrom the DIC display when the coolant temperaturedrops to a safe operating temperature.

Flip Hall Switch FaultThis message will be displayed on the DIC when tryingto raise or lower the convertible top and there is afault with this switch. If the message persists, see yourdealer for service.

Fuel Level LowIf the fuel level is low in the vehicle’s gas tank thismessage will appear on the DIC and you will hear achime. You will also see the check gages warning lighton the instrument panel cluster. See Check GagesWarning Light on page 3-36 for more information.Refuel as soon as possible. See Filling the Tank onpage 5-8 and Fuel Gage on page 3-37 for moreinformation. Press the select button to acknowledgeand clear the message from the display.

Hdr (Header) Latch Switch FaultThis message will be displayed on the DIC when tryingto raise or lower the convertible top and there is afault with this switch. If the message persists, see yourdealer for service.

Manually Open TonneauThis message will be displayed on the DIC whentrying to raise or lower the convertible top while theconvertible top and roof tonneau are where the systemcannot verify their position. The roof system mayneed to be restored manually to a stable position byfully opening the roof tonneau and boot cover panel.See Convertible Top on page 2-37 for more information.

3-47

Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Ifyou do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance maydamage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.

If the oil pressure is low in your vehicle, this messagewill be displayed on the DIC. Stop the vehicle assoon as possible and do not drive it until the cause ofthe low oil pressure has been corrected. Check your oilas soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.See Engine Oil on page 5-14 and Oil Pressure Gage onpage 3-34 for more information.

Passenger Door AjarIf the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this messagewill appear on the display and you will hear a chime.Stop the vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and closethe door again. Fully closing the passenger’s door willclear this message from the display, or you can pressthe select button to acknowledge the message andclear it from the DIC display.

Put Vehicle in ParkThis message will be displayed on the DIC whenattempting to release the cargo cover when the vehicleis not in PARK (P). The vehicle must stopped andthe transmission placed in PARK (P) to release thecargo cover. See Cargo Cover on page 2-32 for moreinformation.

Reduce SpeedThis message will be displayed on the DIC when tryingto raise or lower the convertible top while the vehicleis in motion. Stop the vehicle and continue pressing thebrake pedal before trying to raise or lower the topagain. See Convertible Top on page 2-37 for moreinformation. The message will clear from the displayonce the vehicle is stopped, or you can press the selectbutton to acknowledge this message and clear it fromthe DIC display.

3-48

Rfa X Battery LowIf a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, thismessage will appear on the DIC. The battery needsto be replaced in the transmitter. Press the select buttonto acknowledge this message and clear it from theDIC display. See “Battery Replacement” under RemoteKeyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5 forbattery replacement instructions.

Roof AjarThis message will be displayed on the DIC when tryingto release the cargo cover and the convertible top isnot fully open or closed. Make sure your convertible topis in the full-closed or full-open position before tryingto release your cargo cover. See Convertible Topon page 2-37 and Cargo Cover on page 2-32 formore information. This message will clear once theconvertible top is open or closed, or you can press theselect button to acknowledge the message and clearit from the DIC display.

If this message repeatedly occurs while not trying torelease the cargo cover, see your GM dealer for service.

Roof Cycle TimeoutThis message will be displayed on the DIC when theconvertible top has not completed its movementfrom one position to another within the programmedtime limit. When this message appears, the convertibletop will stop moving. Release the convertible top switchand make sure there is nothing blocking the path ofthe top. If the path is clear, press the convertibletop switch again. See Convertible Top on page 2-37for more information.

When operating the top in low temperatures, such asbelow 32°F (0°C), the time needed to cycle the top willincrease. This may cause the top movement to stopand the Roof Cycle Timeout message to appear onthe DIC display. If this occurs, you may releasethe convertible top switch and depress it again tocontinue the cycle. Make sure nothing is blocking thepath of the top before depressing the switch again.It may be necessary to do this several times to completethe cycle, depending on the outside temperature. SeeConvertible Top on page 2-37 for more information.

Notice: If you operate the convertible top switchcontinuously while the ignition is in ACCESSORY,the battery will drain and you might not be ableto start your vehicle. Do not use the convertible topswitch for extended periods of time when theignition is in ACCESSORY.

3-49

Roof Hall Switch FaultThis message will be displayed on the DIC when tryingto raise or lower the convertible top and there is afault with this switch. If the message persists, see yourdealer for service.

Service Air BagIf there is a problem with the air bag system thismessage will be displayed on the DIC. The air bagreadiness light may also be displayed on the instrumentpanel cluster. See your dealer for service. Press theselect button to acknowledge this message and clear itfrom the display. See Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-52 and Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-25 for more information.

Service Brake SystemIf a problem occurs with the brake system this messagewill appear on the DIC. The brake system warninglight and the anti-lock brake system warning light mayalso be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28 andAnti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-29for more information. If this message appears,stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.

Restart the vehicle and check for the message on theDIC display. If the message is still displayed, or appearsagain when you begin driving, the brake systemneeds service. See Brakes on page 5-33 for moreinformation. Press the select button to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the display.

Stop VehicleThis message will be displayed when attempting torelease the cargo cover while the vehicle is in motion.The vehicle must stopped and the transmissionplaced in PARK (P) to release the cargo cover.See Cargo Cover on page 2-32 for more information.

Tlat (Tonneau Latch) Hall Switch FaultThis message will be displayed when trying to raiseor lower the convertible top and there is a problem withthis switch. If the message persists, see your dealerfor service.

3-50

Tonn (Tonneau) Hall Switch FaultThis message will be displayed when trying to raise orlower the convertible top and there is a fault withthis switch. If the message persists, see your dealerfor service.

Tonn (Tonneau) Latd (Latched)Switch FaultThis message will be displayed when trying to raise orlower the convertible top and there is a fault withthis switch. If the message persists, see your dealerfor service.

Traction ActiveThis message, along with the light on the TractionControl System (TCS) warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster, will be displayed when the TCS system isactive. Press the select button to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the DIC display. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 4-8 and TractionControl System (TCS) Warning Light (AutomaticTransmission) on page 3-29 for more information.

Trans (Transmission) Hot IdleIf the transmission fluid in the vehicle becomes too hot,this message will appear on the DIC. Stop the vehicleand let it idle to allow the transmission fluid to cool.This message will clear when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level. See Automatic Transmission Fluidon page 5-21 and if your vehicle is equipped with theauxiliary gage package, see “Transmission TemperatureGage” under Auxiliary Gage Package on page 3-38for more information.

Turn Signal OnIf a turn signal is left on for 3/4 mile (1.2 km), thismessage will appear on the display and you will hear achime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to theoff position. Press the select button to acknowledge thismessage and clear it from the display. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5 for moreinformation.

Unknown SpeedThis message will be displayed when trying to raise orlower the convertible top and the roof controllercannot communicate with the Powertrain ControlModule (PCM). See your dealer for service.

3-51

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle has a personalization feature that allows youto program certain features to a preferred setting for up totwo drivers. The number of programmable featuresvaries depending upon which model of the vehicle youpurchased. Once the features are programmed, thesaved settings are recalled by pressing the unlock buttonon the remote keyless entry transmitter, 1 or 2, or bypressing the appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, locatedon the outboard side of the driver’s seat. See MemorySeat on page 2-44 for more information.

The following is a list of available programmable options:

• AUTOMATIC LOCKING• AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING• REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK• REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK• HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT• PERIMETER LIGHTING• SEAT POSITION RECALL (If equipped)• DISPLAY LANGUAGE• DISPLAY UNITS (U.S./MET)

y (Personalization): Press this button located on thesteering wheel to access the vehicle personalizationmenu and customize the personalization settingson your vehicle.

Automatic LockingThis feature allows you to choose how the vehicle’sdoors are locked. Press the personalization buttonuntil AUTOMATIC LOCKING appears in the display.To access the modes for AUTOMATIC LOCKING,press the select button. Once AUTOMATIC LOCKING isselected, press the select button to scroll through thefollowing modes:

Mode 1: LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK

Mode 2: LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED

If you choose Mode 1, the doors will lock when thevehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

If you choose Mode 2, the doors will lock whenthe vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) forthree seconds.

Scroll through the list of modes. When the mode youwant is displayed on the DIC, press personalizationbutton to set your choice, return to the personalizationmenu, and advance to the next programmable feature.

For more information on automatic door locks seeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-8.

3-52

Automatic UnlockingThis feature allows you to choose how the vehicle’sdoors are unlocked. Press the personalization buttonuntil AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING appears in the display.To access the modes for AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING,press the select button. Once AUTOMATICUNLOCKING is selected, press the select button toscroll through the following modes:

Mode 1: UNLOCK ALL IN PARK

Mode 2: UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT

Mode 3: UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK

Mode 4: UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY

If you choose Mode 1, all of the doors will unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

If you choose Mode 2, all of the doors will unlock whenthe key is taken out of the ignition.

If you choose Mode 3, the driver’s door will be unlockedwhen the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

If you choose Mode 4, the doors will not be unlockedautomatically.


For more information on automatic door locks seeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-8.

3-53

Remote Lock FeedbackThis feature allows you to choose whether or not thehorn honks and the parking lamps flash when you lockthe vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter.Press the personalization button until REMOTELOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display. To accessthe modes for REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK, pressthe select button. Once REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK isselected, press the select button to scroll through thefollowing modes:

Mode 1: LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH

Mode 2: LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF

Mode 3: LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN

Mode 4: LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS

If you choose Mode 1, the parking lamps will flash eachtime you press the lock button on the remote keylessentry transmitter and the horn will chirp the second timeyou press the lock button.

If you choose Mode 2, there will be no feedback whenlocking the vehicle.

If you choose Mode 3, the horn will chirp the secondtime you press the button with the lock symbol onthe remote keyless entry transmitter.

If you choose Mode 4, the parking lamps will flash eachtime you press the button with the lock symbol on theremote keyless entry transmitter.


3-54

Remote Unlock FeedbackThis feature allows you to choose whether or not theparking lamps flash and the horn honks when youunlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entrytransmitter. Press the personalization button untilREMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display.To access the modes for REMOTE UNLOCKFEEDBACK, press the select button. Once REMOTEUNLOCK FEEDBACK is selected, press the selectbutton to scroll through the following modes:

Mode 1: UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH

Mode 2: UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF

Mode 3: UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN

Mode 4: UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS

If you choose Mode 1, the parking lamps will flash eachtime you press the button with the unlock symbol onthe remote keyless entry transmitter. The horn will chirpthe second time you press the unlock button.

If you choose Mode 2, there will be no feedback whenunlocking the vehicle.

If you choose Mode 3, the horn will chirp the secondtime you press the button with the unlock symbol on theremote keyless entry transmitter.

If you choose Mode 4, the parking lamps will flash eachtime you press the button with the unlock symbol onthe remote keyless entry transmitter.


3-55

Headlamps on at ExitThis feature allows you to set the amount of time youwant the headlamps to remain on after you exit thevehicle. Press the personalization button untilHEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT appears in the display.To access the modes for HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT,press the select button. Once HEADLAMPS ONAT EXIT is selected, press the select button to scrollthrough the following modes:

Mode 1: HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC




Mode 5: HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF

If you choose Mode 5, the headlamps will turn off assoon as you turn off the vehicle.


Perimeter LightingThis feature allows you to choose whether or not certainexterior lamps turn on when the unlock button on theremote keyless entry transmitter is pressed. Pressthe personalization button until PERIMETER LIGHTINGappears in the display. To access the modes forPERIMETER LIGHTING, press the select button.Once PERIMETER LIGHTING is selected, press theselect button to scroll through the following modes:

Mode 1: PERIMETER LIGHTING ON

Mode 2: PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF

If you choose Mode 1, the headlamps and back-uplamps will come on for 40 seconds, if it is dark enoughoutside, when you unlock the vehicle with the remotekeyless entry transmitter.


3-56

Seat Position RecallThis feature allows you to choose how any previouslyprogrammed seat position is recalled. Press thepersonalization button until SEAT POSITION RECALLappears in the display. To access the modes forSEAT POSITION RECALL, press the select button.Once SEAT POSITION RECALL is selected, press theselect button to scroll through the following modes:

Mode 1: SEAT POSITION RECALL OFF

Mode 2: SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN

Mode 3: SEAT POSITION RECALL ON REMOTE

If you choose Mode 1, the memory seat position yousaved will only be recalled when the memorybutton 1 or 2 is pressed.

If you choose Mode 2, the memory seat position yousaved will be recalled when you put the key in theignition.

If you choose Mode 3, the memory seat position yousaved will be recalled when you unlock the vehicle withthe remote keyless entry transmitter.

Scroll through the list of modes. When the mode you wantis displayed on the DIC, press personalization button toset your choice, return to the personalization menu, andadvance to the next programmable feature. See MemorySeat on page 2-44 for more information.

Display LanguageThis feature allows you to choose the language in whichthe DIC information will be displayed. Press the selectbutton until DISPLAY LANGUAGE appears on theDIC. Once DISPLAY LANGUAGE is selected, press theselect button to scroll through the following modes:

Mode 1: ENGLISH

Mode 2: FRANCAIS (French)

Mode 3: ESPANOL (Spanish)

When the language you desire is displayed on the DIC,press personalization button to set your choice,return to the personalization menu, and advance to thenext programmable feature.

If you accidentally choose a language that you don’twant, press and hold the personalization button and thetrip information button at the same time. The DIC willbegin scrolling through the languages in their particularlanguage. English will be in English, French will bein French and so on. When you see the language thatyou would like, release both buttons. The DIC willthen display the information in the language you chose.

3-57

Display Units (U.S./MET)The feature allows you to choose the measurementunits. Press the personalization button until DISPLAYUNITS appears in the display. To access the modesfor DISPLAY UNITS, press the select button.Once DISPLAY UNITS is selected, press the selectbutton to scroll through the following modes:

Mode 1: UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH)

Mode 2: UNITS: METRIC (km/L)

Mode 3: UNITS: METRIC (L/100km)

If you choose Mode 1, all information will be displayedin English units.

If you choose Mode 2 or 3, all information will bedisplayed in metric units.


Audio System(s)Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, makesure that it can be added by checking with yourdealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobileradio and telephone units. If sound equipment canbe added, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere withthe operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that has been added.

Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, findout what your audio system can do, and how to operateall of its controls.

3-58

Setting the TimeThe radio may have a button marked with an H or HR torepresent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes.

Press and hold the hour button until the correct hourappears on the display. AM or PM will appear onthe display for morning or evening hours. Press andhold the minute button until the correct minute appearson the display. The time can be set with the ignitionon or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcastingRadio Data System (RDS) information, press andhold the hour and minute buttons at the same time fortwo seconds until UPDATED and the clock symbolappear on the display. If the time is not available fromthe station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to anRDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes forthe time to update.

Radio with CD

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequency and the time.Push this knob with the ignition off to display the time.

3-59

For RDS, press the DISP knob to change what appearson the display while using RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and thename of the program (if available).

To change the default on the display, press the DISPknob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob for two seconds. The radio will produce onebeep and the selected display will now be the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system will adjust automatically tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive byincreasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appearon the display. Each higher setting will provide morevolume compensation as vehicle speed increases.To turn automatic volume off, press this button untilAVOL OFF appears on the display.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,or AM. The display will show the selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

q SEEK r: Press the right or the left arrow to go tothe next or to the previous station and stay there.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

q SCAN r: Press and hold either arrow for morethan two seconds. SCAN will appear on the display andyou will hear a beep. The radio will go to a station,play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.Press either arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow formore than four seconds. PSCN will appear on thedisplay and you will hear two beeps. The radio will go tothe first preset station, play for a few seconds, thengo on to the next preset station. Press either arrow againor one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

3-60

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), canbe programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttonsuntil you hear a beep. Whenever that numberedpushbutton is pressed, the station that was set willreturn and the equalization that was selected will bestored for that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASSor TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob toincrease or to decrease. The display will show the bassor treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decreasethe treble.

To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produceone beep and adjust the display level to the middleposition.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear onthe display, you will hear a beep, and the display levelwill be adjusted to the middle position.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this buttonto select customized equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,push and release the AUDIO knob until CUSTOMappears on the display.

The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for eachpreset and source.

3-61

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push and release the AUDIOknob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appearson the display. Turn the knob to move the soundtoward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and fade between the middleposition, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again andhold it until you hear one beep. The balance andfade will be adjusted to the middle position and thedisplay will show the speaker balance.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear onthe display, you will hear a beep, and the display levelwill be adjusted to the middle position.

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected typeof programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or call letters will appear on the display instead ofthe frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time ofday, a program type (PTY) for current programming, andthe name of the program being broadcast.

3-62

Finding a Program Type (PTY) StationTo select and find a desired PTY perform the following:

1. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to activate programtype select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appearon the display.

2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the SEEKTYPE button or either SEEK arrow to select and totake you to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY and thePTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE buttononce. If the PTY is not displayed, press the SEEKTYPE button twice to display the PTY and thento go to another station.

5. Press the P-TYPE LIST knob to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,go back to Step 1.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search forstations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONEwill appear on the display and the radio will return tothe last station you were listening to.

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performingthe following:



3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press eitherSCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanningthe stations in the PTY.

4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scanfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON willappear on the display. The radio may switch to stationswith a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.

3-63

Setting Preset PTYsThese buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on thesix numbered pushbuttons, by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.



4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttonsuntil you hear a beep. Whenever that numberedpushbutton is pressed, the PTY that was set willreturn.


RDS MessagesALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the current radiostation, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will hearthe announcement, even if the volume is low or a CD isplaying. If a CD is playing, play will stop during theannouncement. Alert announcements cannot beturned off.

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported by allRDS stations.

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, the information symbol will appear on thedisplay. Press this button to see the message.The message may display the artist, song title, call inphone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the INFObutton. A new group of words will appear on thedisplay after every press of the button.

3-64

Once the complete message has been displayed, theinformation symbol will disappear from the displayuntil another new message is received. The lastmessage can be displayed by pressing the INFO button.You can view the last message until a new messageis received or a different station is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,NO INFO will appear on the display.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display,the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements andwhen a traffic announcement comes on the tunedradio station you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to astation that does. When a station that broadcasts trafficannouncements is found, the radio will stop seekingand TRAF will appear on the display. If no stationis found that broadcasts traffic announcements,NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button toturn off the traffic announcements.

The radio will play the traffic announcement even ifthe volume is low. The radio will interrupt the playof a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system hasbeen calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that theradio has not been configured properly for yourvehicle and must be returned to the dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take yourvehicle to the dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, firstpress the eject button or the DISP knob.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appearon the display. As each new track starts to play,the track number will appear on the display.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

3-65

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. There may be an increasein skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur try aknown good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”later in this section.

1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to thestart of the current track if more than eight secondshave played. TRACK and the track number will appearon the display. If this pushbutton is held or pressedmore than once, the player will continue movingbackward through the CD.

2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.TRACK and the track number will appear on thedisplay. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more thanonce, the player will continue moving forward throughthe CD.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toreverse quickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse atsix times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it formore than two seconds to reverse at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to playthe passage. ET and the elapsed time of the trackwill appear on the display.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toadvance quickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to advanceat six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold itfor more than two seconds to advance at 17 timesthe normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton toplay the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the trackwill appear on the display.

3-66

6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ONwill appear on the display. RDM T and the tracknumber will appear on the display when each trackstarts to play. Press RDM again to turn off random play.RDM OFF will appear on the display.

q SEEK r: Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe current or to the previous track. Press the rightarrow to go to the start of the next track. If either arrowis held or pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving backward or forward through the CD.

q SCAN r: To scan the CD, press and holdeither SCAN arrow for more than two seconds untilSCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Theradio will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds,then go on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrowagain, to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long thecurrent track has been playing. ET and the elapsed timeof the track will appear on the display. To change thedefault on the display, track or elapsed time, pressthis knob until you see the display you want, then holdthe knob for two seconds. The radio will produceone beep and the selected display will now be thedefault.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when aCD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CDwhen listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appearon the display when a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it isplaying or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radio off.CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if thisbutton is pressed first.

3-67

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of the followingreasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displaysan error message, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.

Radio with Six-Disc CD

Playing the RadioPWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the systemon and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequency and the time. Whenthe ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.

To change the default on the display, press the knob untilyou see the display you want, then hold the knob fortwo seconds. The radio will produce one beep and theselected display will now be the default.

Base Radio Shown, Bose ® Similar

3-68

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): The system has afeature called automatic volume. With this feature,the audio system adjusts automatically to make up forroad and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear on thedisplay. Each higher setting will provide more volumecompensation as vehicle speed increases. Then, as youdrive, automatic volume increases the volume, asnecessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volumelevel should always sound the same to you as you drive.To turn automatic volume off, press this button untilAVOL OFF appears on the display.

If your vehicle is equipped with Bose the system willhave AudioPilot® noise compensation technology.AudioPilot® monitors the level of noise in the vehicle andautomatically increases or decreases the level of theaudio to keep the audio above the noise.

To use AudioPilot® set the volume at the desires level.Press the AUTO VOL button until AVOL appears on thedisplay. This feature works best at lower volume settingswhere background noise may be louder than the audio.At high volume settings, where the audio is much louderthan the background noise, there will be no change in theaudio level. To turn automatic volume off, press theAUTO VOL button until AVOL OFF appears on thedisplay.

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go tothe next or to the previous station and stay there.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow fortwo seconds until SC appears on the display andyou hear a beep. The radio will go to a station,play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCANarrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN willappear on the display and you will hear a doublebeep. The radio will go to a preset station stored onyour pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on tothe next preset station. Press either SCAN arrowagain to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only scan stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

3-69

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), canbe programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttonsuntil you hear a beep. Whenever that numberedpushbutton is pressed, the station that was set willreturn and the equalization that was selected will bestored for that pushbutton.


Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knobto increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy,decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push and holdthe AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beepand adjust the display level to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED willappear on the display and you will hear a beep.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this buttonto select customized equalization settings designedfor country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO EQbutton until CUSTOM appears on the display. Thenmanually adjust the bass, midrange, and treble using theAUDIO knob.

3-70

If your vehicle is equipped with Bose®, the audiosystem allows you to choose from three differentequalization settings: normal, driver, and spacious.These settings can be used while listening to the radioor the CD player.

NORMAL: This setting provides the best overall vehiclesound quality for all seating locations.

DRIVER: This setting gives the driver the best soundquality.

SPACIOUS: This setting makes the listening spaceseem larger.

The radio can save separate AUTO EQ settings foreach preset and source.

The Bose system will automatically adjust theequalization to compensate for the change in acousticswhen the convertible top is down. The radio will mutewhen the equalization switches just at the end of the topdown cycle and just at the beginning of the top up cycle.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push and release the AUDIOknob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appearson the display. Turn the knob to move the sound towardthe front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middleposition, select balance or fade and push and hold theAUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and willadjust the display level to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED willappear on the display and you will hear a beep.

3-71

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FM stationsthat broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected typeof programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or call letters will appear on the display instead ofthe frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time ofday, a program type (PTY) for current programming, andthe name of the program being broadcast.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) StationTo select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program typeselect mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY willappear on the display.

2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow to select and to take you to thePTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY and thePTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once.If the PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK arrowtwice to display the PTY and then to go to anotherstation.

5. Press the P-TYPE button to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,go back to Step 1.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search forstations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

3-72

To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold theP-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTYyou want to interrupt with. When selected, an asteriskwill appear beside that PTY on the display. Selectmultiple interrupts if desired. When listening to a CD,the last selected RDS station will interrupt play ifthat selected program type format is broadcast.

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performingthe following:



3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and holdeither SCAN arrow, and the radio will beginscanning the stations in the PTY.

4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.

If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will scanfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

AM FM (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. To turn alternate frequency on,press and hold AM FM for two seconds. AF ONwill appear on the display. The radio may switch tostations with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BANDagain for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on thedisplay. The radio will not switch to other stations.

Setting Preset PTYsThese pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed onthe six numbered pushbuttons, by performing thefollowing steps:

1. Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2.



4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttonsuntil you hear a beep. Whenever that numberedpushbutton is pressed, the PTY that was set willreturn.


3-73

RDS MessagesALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is mutedor a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stopduring the announcement. You will not be able to turnoff alert announcements.

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO will appear on the display. Press thisbutton to see the message. The message may displaythe artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the whole message is not displayed, parts of themessage will appear every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message at your own speed, pressthe INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words willappear on the display with each press. Once thecomplete message has been displayed, INFO willdisappear from the display until another new messageis received. The old message can be displayed bypressing the INFO button. You can view an old messageuntil a new message is received or a different stationis tuned to.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display,the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.To receive the traffic announcement from the tunedstation, press this button. Brackets will be displayedaround TRAF and when a traffic announcement comeson the tuned radio station you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press this button and the radiowill seek to a station that does. When the radio finds astation that broadcasts traffic announcements, theradio will stop and brackets will be displayed aroundTRAF. When a traffic announcement comes onthe tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station isfound, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, youcan then press the TRAF button to remove the bracketsor use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to astation that supports traffic announcements. If no stationis found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.

Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a CD ifthe last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcementsand the brackets are displayed.

3-74

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it will stay in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear onthe CD. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber will appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. There may be an increasein skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If these problems occur try aknown good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caughtin the CD player.


LOAD CDZ: Press the LOAD side of this button toload CDs into the CD player. This CD player willhold up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of theslot, to turn green.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.You will hear a beep and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, will begin to flash.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, loada CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label sideup. The player will pull the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, the light will begin flashingagain. Once the light stops flashing and turns greenyou can load another CD. The CD player takes up tosix CDs. Do not try to load more than six.

3-75

To load more than one CD but less than six, completeSteps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, theradio will begin to play the last CD loaded.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear onthe display. If more than one CD has been loaded,a number for each CD will appear on the display. If youselect an equalization setting for your CD, it will beactivated each time you play a CD.

As each new track starts to play, the track number willappear on the display.

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number will appear on thedisplay. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUXbutton, then press the numbered pushbutton thatcorresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear underthe CD number that is playing and the track numberwill appear.


LOAD CDZ (Eject): Press the CD eject side ofthis button to eject a CD(s). To eject the CD thatis currently playing, press and release this button.To eject multiple CDs, press and hold this button fortwo seconds. You will hear a beep and the indicator lightwill flash to let you know when a CD is being ejected.

REMOVE CD will appear on the display. The CD can beremoved. If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds,the CD will be automatically pulled back into the player.If the CD is pushed back into the player, before the25 second time period is complete, the player will sensean error and will try to eject the CD several timesbefore stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject aCD after trying to push it in manually. The player’s25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject,causing the player to not eject the CD until the25-second time period has elapsed.

Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, removethe CD. After removing the CD, push the PWR knob offand then on again, or wait for the system to reset.This will clear the CD-sensing feature and enable CDsto be loaded into the player again.

3-76

{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release the button to play the passage.The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.

FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button toadvance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at areduced volume. Release the button to play the passage.The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CDcan be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, press andrelease the RPT button. RPT will appear on thedisplay. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press andhold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT willappear on the display. Press RPT again to turn offrepeat play.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order,on one CD or on all of the CDs.

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to inrandom order, press and release the RDM button.RANDOM ONE will appear on the display.Press RDM again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loadedin random order, press and hold RDM for morethan two seconds. You will hear a beep andRANDOM ALL will appear on the display.Press RDM again to turn off random play.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQto select the equalization setting while playing a CD.The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”listed previously in this section.

sSEEK t: Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe current track, if more than ten seconds have played.Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If eitherarrow is held or pressed more than once, the player willcontinue moving backward or forward through the CD.

3-77

sSCAN t: To scan one CD, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep.The radio will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds,then go on to the next track. Press either SCANarrow again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCANarrow for more than four seconds until CD SCANappears on the display and you hear a beep. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of eachloaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stopscanning.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long thecurrent track has been playing. To change the defaulton the display, track and elapsed time, press theknob until you see the display you want, then hold theknob until the display flashes. The selected displaywill now be the default.

AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when aCD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain in theradio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CDwhen listening to the radio.

Using Song List ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at leastone CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in thissection for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song listmode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.If S-LIST is on the display, press the SONG LISTbutton to turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numberedpushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN rightarrow to locate the track to be saved. The track willbegin to play.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save thetrack into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed,one beep will be heard immediately. After twoseconds of continuously pressing the SONG LISTbutton, two beeps will be heard to confirm the trackhas been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to savemore than 20 selections.

3-78

To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on thedisplay. The recorded tracks will begin to play inthe order they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCANarrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return youto the first saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.S-LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desiredtrack to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button fortwo seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,a beep will be heard immediately. After two secondsof continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,two beeps will be heard to confirm the trackhas been deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks aremoved up the list. When another track is added to thesong list, the track will be added to the end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.S-LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for morethan four seconds. One beep will be heard,followed by two beeps after two seconds, and afinal beep will be heard after four seconds.S-LIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicatingthe song list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains savedtracks from that CD, those tracks are automaticallydeleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to thesong list again are added to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed fromthe display.

3-79

CD MessagesCHECK CD: If this message appears on the displayand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displaysan error message, write it down and provide it to yourdealer when reporting the problem.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of yourvehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically bylearning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will notoperate and LOCKED will appear on the display.When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinkingred light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operateif stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.

3-80

They include the following:

Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous radio station and staythere. The radio will only seek stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrowto fast forward or reverse.

QuR (Volume): Press the up or the down arrowto increase or to decrease the volume.

Radio Reception

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range, however, cancause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pickup noise from things like storms and power lines.Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise.

FMFM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to come and go.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away from directsunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergentsolution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writing whenhandling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edgesor the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of theCD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Integrated Windshield AntennaThe antenna in your vehicle is a very thin, metal layer inthe windshield. The outline of the antenna can beseen near the edges of the windshield. The connector isat the top of the windshield, where the headliner ends.

If difficulty with remote transmitters is experienced,such as a garage door opener, try pointing the devicethrough the very top of the windshield.

3-81

✍ NOTES

3-82

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunken Driving .............................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5Braking .........................................................4-6Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8Steering ......................................................4-10Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12Passing .......................................................4-12Loss of Control .............................................4-13Driving at Night ............................................4-15Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17City Driving ..................................................4-20

Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24Winter Driving ..............................................4-26If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice

or Snow ...................................................4-30Towing ..........................................................4-30

Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-30Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-31Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-31Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-38Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-38

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in yourvehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-6.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going tobe careless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough followingdistance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, inboth city and rural driving. You never know whenthe vehicle in front of you is going to brake orturn suddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate onthe driving task. Anything that distracts from the drivingtask — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes

proper defensive driving more difficult and can evencause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger tohelp do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe placeto do them yourself. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving isa national tragedy. It is the number one contributorto the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.

4-2

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adultpopulation — choose never to drink alcohol, so theynever drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But what if people do? How much is “toomuch” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot lessthan many might think. Although it depends on eachperson and situation, here is some general informationon the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BACof about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A personwho consumes food just before or during drinking willhave a somewhat lower BAC level.

4-3

There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body waterthan men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higher BAClevel than a man of her same body weight will wheneach has the same number of drinks.

The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, andthroughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the UnitedStates is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, itdepends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, andhow quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skillsof many people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.

Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcoholin one drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not theright answer. What if there is an emergency, a need totake sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able toreact quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking and driving thatmany people do not know. Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuriesworse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord orheart. This means that when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had not been drinking.

4-4

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home in acab; or if you are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systems have todo their work at the places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, itis easy to ask more of those control systems thanthe tires and road can provide. That means you can losecontrol of your vehicle.

4-5

BrakingBraking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That is perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But thatis only an average. It might be less with one driverand as long as two or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordinationand eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs andfrustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle movingat 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keepingenough space between your vehicle and others isimportant.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road (whether it is pavementor gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tiretread; the condition of your brakes; the weight ofthe vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. Your brakes may not have time to coolbetween hard stops. Your brakes will wear out muchfaster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace

with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brakenormally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,the pedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist.But you will use it when you brake. Once the powerassist is used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-lock Brake SystemYour vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advancedelectronic braking system that will help prevent abraking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to drive away,your anti-lock brake system will check itself. Youmay hear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on. This is normal.

If there is a problem withthe anti-lock brake system,this warning light willstay on. See Anti-LockBrake System WarningLight on page 3-29.

4-6

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each front wheeland at both rear wheels.

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressurefaster than any driver could. The computer isprogrammed to make the most of available tire androad conditions. This can help you steer aroundthe obstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls braking pressureaccordingly.

4-7

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If you get too close tothe vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to applyyour brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, eventhough you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-LockDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feelthe brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The system operates only if it sensesthat one or both of the rear wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens,the system reduces engine power and may alsoupshift the transmission to limit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again, you mayre-engage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control”in Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.

The Traction Control System operates in all transmissionshift lever positions except for first gear. This isnormal. The system is deactivated when thetransmission is shifted into first gear. In this situation,the “TRAC OFF” light on the instrument panel cluster willcome on. This is normal. The system can upshift thetransmission only as high as the shift lever positionyou’ve chosen, so you should use the lower gears onlywhen necessary. See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-17.

4-8

When the system is on,this warning light will comeon to let you know ifthere’s a problem.

When this warning light is on, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

If the Traction Control System (TCS) is on and you drivefaster than 100 mph (161 km/h), the system will turnoff and the TC warning light will come on. The TCS willturn back on and the TC warning light will go outonce the vehicle speed falls below 90 mph (145 km/h).See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light(Automatic Transmission) on page 3-29.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the Traction ControlSystem on. But you can turn the system off if youever need to. You should turn the system off if yourvehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow androcking the vehicle is required. See “Rocking YourVehicle” in If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice orSnow on page 4-30.

To turn the system on oroff press the buttonlocated on your centerconsole switchbank. SeeCenter ConsoleSwitchbank on page 3-16for more information.

When you turn the system off, the Traction ControlSystem warning light will come on and stay on. If theTraction Control System is limiting wheel spin when youpress the button to turn the system off, the warninglight will come on and the system will turn off right away.

You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The Traction Control Systemwarning light should go off.

4-9

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.

Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angle atwhich the curve is banked, and your speed. Whileyou are in a curve, speed is the one factor youcan control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have to dotheir work where the tires meet the road. Addingthe sudden acceleration can demand too much of thoseplaces. You can lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way youwant it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-10

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Youcan avoid these problems by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as muchspeed as you can from a possible collision. Thensteer around the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-11

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder while youare driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or angercan suddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides andto crossroads for situations that might affect yourpassing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoeverabout making a successful pass, wait for a bettertime.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate aturn or an intersection, delay your pass. A brokencenter line usually indicates it is all right to pass,providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solid line,even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

4-12

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to passwhile you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,following too closely reduces your area of vision,especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also,you will not have adequate space if the vehicleahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and donot get too close. Time your move so you will beincreasing speed as the time comes to move into theother lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have arunning start that more than makes up for thedistance you would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancel yourpass, you need only slow down and drop back againand wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,wait your turn. But take care that someone is nottrying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slowvehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder andcheck the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, andstart your left lane change signal before moving outof the right lane to pass. When you are far enoughahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your

inside mirror, activate your right lane change signaland move back into the right lane. Remember thatyour right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle youjust passed may seem to be farther away from youthan it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing thenext vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it maybe slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you canease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route or area ofless danger.

4-13

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsare not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, toomuch speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slipand lose cornering force. And in the accelerationskid, too much throttle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid onlythe acceleration skid. If your traction control system isoff, then an acceleration skid is also best handledby easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, youwill want to slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including engine braking by shifting to alower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirrored surface — andslow down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.

4-14

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely to beimpaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may need toslow down and keep more space between youand other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe placeand rest.

4-15

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Butas we get older these differences increase. A50-year-old driver may require at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if youare driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. Theymay cut down on glare from headlamps, but they alsomake a lot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. Whenyou are faced with severe glare, as from a driverwho does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoidstaring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keepyour eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see in dim light — andare not even aware of it.

4-16

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as wellbecause your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on

dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread left,you will get even less traction. It is always wise to goslower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you aredriving. The surface may get wet suddenly when yourreflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavyrain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shapeand keep your windshield washer tank filled withwasher fluid. Replace your windshield wiper insertswhen they show signs of streaking or missing areas onthe windshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.

4-17

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoidpuddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down beforeyou hit them.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will notwork as well in a quick stop and may causepulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightlyuntil your brakes work normally.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

4-18

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if yourtires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one ormore is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standingon the road. If you can see reflections from trees,telephone poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops dimplethe water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badly damageyour engine. Never drive through water that isslightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. Ifyou cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.If you try to drive through flowing water, as youmight at a low water crossing, your vehicle canbe carried away. As little as six inches offlowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignore policewarning signs, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when youpass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clearroom ahead, and be prepared to have yourview restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-51.

4-19

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attention totraffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your trip intoan unknown part of the city just as you would for across-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time and energy.See Freeway Driving on page 4-21.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A trafficlight is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it. When a light turns green, and just beforeyou start to move, check both ways for vehiclesthat have not cleared the intersection or maybe running the red light.

4-20

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are thesafest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keepup with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at thesame speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth trafficflow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to thefreeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as youdrive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to checktraffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend withthe flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to theprevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check yourmirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often asnecessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to theposted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.

4-21

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle inyour blind spot.Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain youallow a reasonable following distance. Expect tomove slightly slower at night.When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, donot, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to the next exit.The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.The exit speed is usually posted.Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for any distanceat higher speeds, you may tend to think you aregoing slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you are not fresh — such as aftera day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles thatfirst part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service experts inGM dealerships all across North America. They will beready and willing to help if you need it.

4-22

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Areall windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip ashort time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call ithighway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on theroad, the drone of the engine, and the rush of thewind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Donot let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle canleave the road in less than a second, and you couldcrash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead andto the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, get someexercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsinesson the highway as an emergency.

4-23

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,and transmission. These parts can work hardon mountain roads.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you godown a steep or long hill.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakes could getso hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let your engine assist your brakes on asteep downhill slope.

4-24

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down. They couldget so hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Alwayshave your engine running and your vehicle ingear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift downto a lower gear. The lower gears help cool yourengine and transmission, and you can climb thehill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalled car oran accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains that warnof special problems. Examples are long grades,passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, orwinding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriateaction.

4-25

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergency supplies inyour vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 5-51.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, ifyou will be driving under severe conditions, include asmall bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple ofburlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure youproperly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meetthe road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation. Youwill have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to bevery careful.

4-26

What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wetice can be even more trouble because it may offerthe least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it isabout freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain beginsto fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sandcrews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowingor loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. Ifyou accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin andpolish the surface under the tires even more.

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stabilitywhen you make a hard stop on a slippery road.Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, youwill want to begin stopping sooner than you would ondry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that is covered with ice. Onan otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun can not reach:around clumps of trees, behind buildings or underbridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may remain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patch of ice aheadof you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brakewhile you are actually on the ice, and avoidsudden steering maneuvers.

4-27

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:• Turn on your hazard flashers.• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that

you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you have no blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-28

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannot see itor smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.

4-29

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you willneed to spin the wheels, but you do not want tospin your wheels too fast. The method known as“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck, butyou must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, theycan explode, and you or others could be injured.And, the transmission or other parts of thevehicle can overheat. That could cause anengine compartment fire or other damage.When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts ofyour vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your transmissionback and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-64.

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around your front wheels. Turn yourtraction control system off; see Traction Control System(TCS) on page 4-8. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. Release the accelerator pedalwhile you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinningyour wheels in the forward and reverse directions, youwill cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries,you may need to be towed out. If you do need tobe towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-30.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your disabled vehicle towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.

For information about recreational vehicle towing, seethe following entry.

4-30

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing your vehiclebehind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing yourvehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dollytowing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels onthe ground and two wheels up on a device knownas a “dolly”).

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with two or allfour wheels on the ground, the transmission couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with twoor all four wheels on the ground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any ofits wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must betowed, it should be placed on a platform trailer.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labelson your vehicle show how much weight it may properlycarry, the Tire and Loading Information label and theCertification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or eitherthe maximum front or rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). If you do, parts on yourvehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of your vehicle.

4-31

Tire and Loading Information Label

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight

The Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. Vehicleswithout a center pillar will have the Tire and LoadingInformation label attached to the driver’s door edge. Thislabel lists the number of people that can be in yourvehicle and the total weight it can carry. This weight iscalled the vehicle capacity weight.

The Tire and Loading Information label also tells youthe size and recommended inflation pressure forthe original equipment tires on your vehicle. For moreinformation on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-51and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56.

If your vehicle does not have the Tire and LoadingInformation label, the Certification/Tire label shows thetire size and recommended inflation pressuresneeded to obtain the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX pounds” on your vehicle placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

United States shown, Canada similar

4-32

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount ofcargo and luggage load capacity. For example, ifthe “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage andcargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load fromyour trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Loading Your VehicleItem Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1= 400 lbs (181 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) x 1=

150 lbs (68 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1

4-33


A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 2 = 400 lbs (181 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) x 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C AvailableCargo Weight = 100 lbs (45 kg)


A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 3 = 400 lbs (181 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 200 lbs(91 kg) x 2 =

400 lbs (181 kg)

C AvailableCargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading label for specificinformation about your vehicle’s capacity weight andseating positions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

4-34

Certification/Tire Label

The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s dooredge, below the door latch. The label shows the sizeof your original tires and the inflation pressures neededto obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight, ifpulling a trailer.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximumweights for the front and rear axles, called GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loadson your rear axle, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your load equally on bothsides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWRfor the rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread itout and load toward the front of the pickup box.

United States shown, Canada similar

4-35

Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRsand payloads. Please note the Certification/Tirelabel on your truck or consult your dealer foradditional details.

{CAUTION:

In the case of a sudden stop or collision,things carried in the bed of your truck couldshift forward and come into the passengerarea, injuring you and others. If you put thingsin the bed of your truck, you should make surethey are properly secured.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or eitherthe maximum front or rear Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). If you do, parts on yourvehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension components to get addeddurability might not change your weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle—like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else—they will go as fastas the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

4-36

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the rear area of your vehicle.Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,above the tops of the seats inside thevehicle or in the cargo area when theconvertible top is lowered.

• If you carry tall objects in the cargo area,secure them properly and have theconvertible top fastened in the raisedposition.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

PayloadThis is the maximum load capacity that your vehicle cancarry. Be sure to include the weight of the occupantsas part of your load. If you added any accessoriesor equipment after your vehicle left the factory,remember to subtract the weight of these things fromthe payload. Your dealer can help you with this.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Add-On EquipmentWhen you carry removable items, you may need to puta limit on how many people you carry inside yourvehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buyand install the new equipment.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the rear axle. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-31.

4-37

Trailer RecommendationsYou must subtract your hitch load from the CargoWeight Rating (CWR) for your vehicle. The CWR is themaximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry.The CWR does not include the weight of the peopleinside, but you can figure about 150 lbs (68 kg) for eachseating position. The total cargo load must not bemore than the vehicle’s CWR. Make sure to weigh yourvehicle with your trailer attached, so that you won’tgo over the GVWR or the GAWR.

You’ll get the best performance if you spread out theweight of your load the right way, and if you choose thecorrect hitch and trailer brakes.

For more information, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-38later in this section.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipment anddrive properly, you can lose control when youpull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well — or evenat all. You and your passengers could beseriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you havefollowed all the steps in this section. Ask yourdealer for advice and information about towinga trailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damageyour vehicle and result in costly repairs that wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe instructions in this section and check with yourdealer for more information about towing a trailerwith your vehicle.

To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for yourvehicle, you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.

4-38

If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration, braking, durabilityand fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules. Many ofthese are important for your safety and that of yourpassengers. So please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.

If You Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you livebut also where you’ll be driving. A good source forthis information can be state or provincial police.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,axle or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle wear in atthe heavier loads.

• Tow the trailer in DRIVE (D). You may want to shiftthe transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, alower gear if the transmission shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• Weight of the trailer

• Weight of the trailer tongue

• Weight on your vehicle’s tires

4-39

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. And, it can also dependon any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming thedriver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and ithas all the required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers and cargoin the tow vehicle must be subtracted from themaximum trailer weight. The weight of the trailer tonguealso affects the maximum trailer weight. See “Weightof the Trailer Tongue” later in this section.

Your vehicle is a two-wheel drive vehicle. The axle ratiois 3.73, the maximum trailer weight is 2,500 lbs.(1 134 kg) and the Gross Combination Weight Rating(GCWR) is 8,000 lbs. (3 629 kg).

The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is thetotal allowable weight of the completely loadedvehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicleshould not be exceeded.

You can ask your dealer for trailering information oradvice, or you can write us at the address listed in yourWarranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-40

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weightto measure because it affects the total gross weightof your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo youmay carry in it, and the people who will be riding inthe vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce thetongue weight your vehicle can carry, which willalso reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. Andif you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your vehicle will be carryingthat weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31for more information about your vehicle’s maximumload capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up toa maximum of 250 lbs (113 kg) with the equipped hitch.

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weightfor your vehicle. Only use the equipped hitch that comeswith your vehicle.

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately to see if the weightsare proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to getthem right simply by moving some items around inthe trailer.

4-41

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limitfor cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theCertification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31. Then besure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,including the weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesYour vehicle is compatible only with the followingtrailering hitch. To order this hitch, see your dealer.

A. Centering DeviceB. HandwheelC. Lock

D. Ball RodE. Ball (purchased

separately)F. Chain Loop

4-42

Installing the Ball RodTo install the ball rod do the following:

1. Remove the cover of the housing located behindthe license plate area by pushing in the tabs andpulling downward.

2. Be sure the unit is unlocked before pretensioning.Unlock using the key.Then pretension the ball rod by pulling out thehandwheel and turning it counterclockwise. Whenthe ball is pretensioned, it means:• The red area of the handwheel should be

opposite the white marking on the ball rod.• The key cannot be withdrawn.• The ball rod can only be installed in this position.

If the key is inserted and the lock is open,tighten the handwheel slightly and turn clockwiseas far as the stop. Insert the ball rod as farinto the housing as it will go. When this happens,you will hear the lock engage.

4-43

3. Check that the ball rod is tight by doingthe following:

• Close the lock, withdraw the key, and install thelock cover securely.

• The green area on the handwheel should beopposite the white dot on the ball rod.

• Move the hitch back and forth to ensure it isproperly secured.

If you cannot complete all of the above checks, repeatthe assembly procedure.

Removing the Ball RodTo remove the ball rod do the following:

1. Open the lock cover on the handwheel and unlockwith the key.

4-44

2. Hold the ball rod tight with one hand, tighten thehandwheel slightly and turn it clockwise as far asit will go.

3. Pull the ball rod down and off. Store the ball rod forfuture use.

4. Reinstall the housing cover.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between your vehicleand your trailer. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue fromcontacting the road if it becomes separated fromthe hitch. Instructions about safety chains may beprovided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’srecommendation for attaching safety chains and do notattach them to the bumper. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your rig. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

4-45

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes—and they must beadequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructionsfor the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,adjust and maintain them properly.

Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’shydraulic brake system only if:

• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

• The trailer’s brake system will use less than0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’smaster cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systemswon’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.

If everything checks out this far, then make the brakefluid tap at the port on the master cylinder thatsends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use coppertubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.Use steel brake tubing.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to getto know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel ofhandling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.

And always keep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch, parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead asyou would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deallonger, you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

4-46

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns while traileringcould cause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turnsthan normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strikesoft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extrawiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (includedin the optional trailering package).

The arrows on your instrument panel will flash wheneveryou signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other driversyou’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behindyou are seeing your signal when they are not. It’simportant to check occasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you startdown a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use your brakes so much thatthey would get hot and no longer work well.

Under normal conditions, use DRIVE (D) to tow a trailer.You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3)or, if necessary, a lower gear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loads or hilly conditions.

When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn yourengine off immediately after towing at high altitudeon steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signssimilar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let theengine run while parked (preferably on level ground)with the transmission in PARK (P) for a few minutesbefore turning the engine off. If you do get the overheatwarning, see Engine Overheating on page 5-27.

4-47

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with atrailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. Peoplecan be injured, and both your vehicle and thetrailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’show to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet. Then turn your wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocks under thetrailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal downwhile you:

• Start your engine.

• Shift into a gear.

• Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

4-48

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often when you’repulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-5 for more information. Things that are especiallyimportant in trailer operation are automatic transmissionfluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt,cooling system and brake system. Each of these iscovered in this manual. If you’re trailering, it’s agood idea to review these sections before you startyour trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.

Trailer Wiring HarnessThe trailer wiring is a four-wire harness assembly. Thewires are blunted and taped to the wiring harness.The harness and wiring are stored under the vehicle onthe driver’s side. The harness has no connector andshould be wired by a qualified electrical technician. Thetechnician can use the following color code chartwhen connecting the wiring harness to your trailer.

• Black: Ground wire.

• Yellow: Left turn lamps.

• Dark Green: Right turn lamps.

• Brown: Parking lamps.

Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tape orstrap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure youleave it loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend orbreak, but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Storethe harness in its original place. Wrap the harnesstogether and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.

4-49

✍ NOTES

4-50

Service ............................................................5-3Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-5Fuel ................................................................5-5

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6California Fuel ...............................................5-6Additives .......................................................5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-11Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-14Engine Cover ...............................................5-19Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-21Engine Coolant .............................................5-24Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26Engine Overheating .......................................5-27Cooling System ............................................5-28Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-31Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-32

Brakes ........................................................5-33Battery ........................................................5-36Jump Starting ...............................................5-36

Rear Axle .......................................................5-42Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-42Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-43

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-43Headlamps ..................................................5-43Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Parking Lamps ..........................................5-44Taillamps .....................................................5-46Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-47Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-48

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-48Tires ..............................................................5-51

Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-56Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-57When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-58Buying New Tires .........................................5-59Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-60Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-61Wheel Replacement ......................................5-62Tire Chains ..................................................5-64If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-65Tire Inflator Kit .............................................5-66

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Appearance Care ............................................5-72Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-73Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-75Weatherstrips ...............................................5-75Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .................5-75Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-78Finish Damage .............................................5-78Underbody Maintenance ................................5-78Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-78Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-79

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-80Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-80Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-80

Electrical System ............................................5-81Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-81Headlamps ..................................................5-81Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-81Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-81Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-82

Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-90Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........5-91

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you tobe happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealerfor all your service needs. You will get genuine GM partsand GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, andsome component wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

5-3

Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, youwill want to use the proper service manual. It tellsyou much more about how to service your vehicle thanthis manual can. To order the proper service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-9.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto do your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-52.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts andlist the mileage and the date of any service workyou perform. See Part E: Maintenance Recordon page 6-17.

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement parts,and tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

5-4

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehiclecan affect the airflow around it. This may causewind noise and affect windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer before adding equipment tothe outside of your vehicle.

FuelThe 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)shows the code letter or number that identifies yourengine. You will find the VIN at the top left of theinstrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) on page 5-80.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octaneof 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, youmay get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higheras soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damageyour engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerateor drive uphill is considered normal. This does notindicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel isnecessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octanefuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needsservice.

5-5

Gasoline SpecificationsIt is recommended that gasoline meet specificationswhich were developed by the American AutomobileManufacturers Association and endorsed by theCanadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for bettervehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolinemeeting these specifications could provide improveddriveability and emission control system performancecompared to other gasoline.

In Canada, look for the“Auto Makers’ Choice”label on the pump.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards, it is designed to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. See the underhoodemission control label. If this fuel is not availablein states adopting California emissions standards,your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may faila smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-30. If this occurs, return to your authorizedGM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairsmay not be covered by your warranty.

Canada Only

5-6

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additives that willhelp prevent engine and fuel system deposits fromforming, allowing your emission control system towork properly. You should not have to add anything toyour fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area to contribute to clean air.General Motors recommends that you use thesegasolines, particularly if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuelthat contains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuelsystem and also damage the plastic and rubberparts. That damage would not be covered underyour warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. General Motorsdoes not recommend the use of such gasolines.

Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugsand the performance of the emission control systemmay be affected. The malfunction indicator lampmay turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorizedGM dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business inthe country where you will be driving.

5-7

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuriesto you and others, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island. Turn offyour engine when you are refueling. Do notsmoke if you are near fuel or refueling yourvehicle. Keep sparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do not leave thefuel pump unattended when refueling yourvehicle — this is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is behind a hinged door on thedriver’s side of the vehicle.

5-8

While refueling, let the fuelcap hang by the tetherbelow the fuel fill opening.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring to it; if youlet go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray outon you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.This spray can happen if your tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hot weather. Openthe fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noiseto stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning theOutside of Your Vehicle on page 5-75.

When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to theright (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Makesure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel to evaporate in tothe atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-30.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-30.

5-9

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injuryto you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washerand other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

5-10

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handlelocated inside thevehicle on the lowerleft side of theinstrument panel.

2. Release the secondary latch at the front ofthe hood.

3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gas strutswill automatically take over to lift and hold thehood in the fully open position.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then, pull the hood down to close.You must drop the hood from about 12 inches (30 cm)or less to latch the hood properly.

5-11

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the engine, you’ll see:

5-12

A. Remote Positive Terminal. See Jump Startingon page 5-36 for more information.

B. Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolanton page 5-24 for more information.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-14for more information.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-14for more information.

E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-21for more information.

F. Engine Cover. See Engine Cover on page 5-19for more information.

G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-20 for more information.

H. Remote Negative Terminal. See Jump Startingon page 5-36 for more information.

I. Power Steering Reservoir. See Power Steering Fluidon page 5-31 for more information.

J. Brake Master Cylinder. See Brakes on page 5-33for more information.

K. Underhood Fuse Block Cover. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 5-82 for more information.

L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-32 for more information.

5-13

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstickhandle is a yellow ringlocated in the enginecompartment toward thepassenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstickmight not show the actual level.

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-14

When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is at or below the hole at the tip of the dipstick,then you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. Butyou must use the right kind. This part explains whatkind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-90.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above the upperhole, your engine could be damaged.

The engine oil fill cap islocated in the enginecompartment toward thepassenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you’re through.

5-15

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseOils recommended for your vehicle can be identifiedby looking for the starburst symbol.

This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified bythe American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not useany oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.

If you choose to performthe engine oil changeservice yourself, be surethe oil you use hasthe starburst symbolon the front of the oilcontainer. If you haveyour oil changed for you,be sure the oil put intoyour engine is AmericanPetroleum Institute certifiedfor gasoline engines.

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for yourvehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart.

5-16

As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is theonly viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle.You should look for and use only oils which have theAPI Starburst symbol and which are also identifiedas SAE 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils,you can use an SAE 10W-30 oil which has the APIStarburst symbol, if it’s going to be 0°F (−18°C)or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, suchas SAE 10W-40 or SAE 20W-50 under any conditions.

Notice: Use only engine oil with the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered byyour warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provideeasier cold starting and better protection for yourengine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDon’t add anything to your oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol are all you will need forgood performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil(GM Oil Life System)Your vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter. This isbased on engine revolutions and engine temperature,and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil change will be indicatedcan vary considerably. For the oil life system towork properly, you must reset the system every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A change engine oil light will come on.Change your oil as soon as possible within the nexttwo times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the oil life systemmay not indicate that an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trainedservice people who will perform this work using genuineGM parts and reset the system. It is also important tocheck your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since yourlast oil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

5-17

How to Reset the Change Engine Oil LightThe GM Oil Life System calculates when to changeyour engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so itcan calculate when the next oil change is required.If a situation occurs where you change your oil priorto a change engine oil light being turned on, resetthe system.

To reset the change engine oil light, do the following:

1. Press the fuel information button until ENGINEOIL LIFE appears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Controls and Displayson page 3-41 for more information.

2. Press and hold the select button. The engine oillife percentage will return to 100.

3. Turn the key to OFF.

If the change engine oil light comes back on when youstart your vehicle, the engine oil life system has notreset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that may beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, orinto streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle itby taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you havea problem properly disposing of your used oil, askyour dealer, a service station or a local recycling centerfor help.

5-18

Engine CoverYour vehicle has a removable engine cover.

To remove the engine cover do the following:

1. Remove the engine cover insert if your vehiclehas one. See “Engine Cover Insert” following forinstructions.

2. Unscrew the three bolts from the engine and liftoff the cover.

3. To reinstall the engine cover, reverse the steps.

Engine Cover InsertYour vehicle may havean engine cover insert.

The engine cover insert must be removed to access thebolts that secure the engine cover to the vehicle.

Use the following procedure to remove the engine coverinsert:

1. Using a flat-bladed tool, lift up on the front outboardedges of the engine cover insert to release the clips.

2. Slide the engine cover insert rearward to releasethe insert from the two hooks located at the rearoutboard edges of the insert.

3. Lift off the engine cover insert.

4. To reinstall the insert, reverse the steps.

5-19

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is located at the center frontof the engine compartment. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 for location of the engineair cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at each oil change andreplace it at the first oil change after 25,000 miles(41 500 km). See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5for more information.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter fromthe vehicle and lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:

1. Remove the two bolts on the engine air cleaner/filterand lift off the cover.

2. Twist out the old engine air cleaner/filter andreplace it, if necessary.

3. Reinstall the cover.

5-20

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned.The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helpsto stop flame if the engine backfires. If it isnot there and the engine backfires, you couldbe burned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which will damageit. Always have the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change theAutomatic Transmission FluidA good time to check your automatic transmission fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change both the fluid and filter every 30,000 miles(50 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under oneor more of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.

• When doing frequent trailer towing.

• Uses such as found in taxi, police or deliveryservice.

If you do not use your vehicle under any ofthese conditions, change the fluid and filter every60,000 miles (100 000 km).

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5.

5-21

How to Check the AutomaticTransmission FluidBecause this operation can be difficult, you may chooseto have this done at the dealership service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damageyour transmission. Too much can mean that someof the fluid could come out and fall on hot enginepart or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.Too little fluid could cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if youcheck your transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic—especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normaloperating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F(82°C to 93°C). If your vehicle has the auxiliary gagepackage, you can check the transmission fluidtemperature. See Auxiliary Gage Package on page 3-38for more information.

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles(24 km) when outside temperatures are above50°F (10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), drive thevehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gagemoves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle hasbeen sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,but this is used only as a reference. Let the enginerun at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluidlevel be low during this cold check, you must checkthe fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hotwill give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.

5-22

Checking the Automatic TransmissionFluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the enginerunning.

• With the parking brake applied, place the shift leverin PARK (P).

• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shiftlever through each gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then, position the shiftlever in PARK (P).

• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

The transmission dipstickhandle may have thissymbol on it or sayTRANS/LOCK.

The transmission dipstick is located on the passenger’sside of the vehicle in the rear of the engine compartment.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 formore information on location.

1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstickand wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds andthen pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lowerlevel. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or inthe HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle downto lock the dipstick in place.

5-23

How to Add Automatic TransmissionFluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transmission fluid to use. SeePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-15.

Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid whileit is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.)If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the properfluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hotcheck. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeledDEXRON®-III, because fluid with that label ismade especially for your automatic transmission.Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON ®-III isnot covered by your new vehicle warranty.

• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check” earlier.

• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way; then flip the handledown to lock the dipstick in place.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you addonly DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and howto add coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating or if you need to add coolant toyour radiator, see Engine Overheating on page 5-27.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

5-24

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damagealuminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,you don’t need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will.



Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, your engine couldget too hot but you would not get the overheatwarning. Your engine could catch fire and youor others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ®

coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do nothave to add extra inhibitors or additives which claimto improve the system. These can be harmful.

5-25

Checking CoolantThe engine coolant surge tank is located on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle at the rear of the enginecompartment. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more information on location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at theFULL COLD mark or a little higher.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture to the coolant surge tank, but be carefulnot to spill it.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steam andscalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.Never turn the surge tank pressure cap — evena little — when the engine and radiator are hot.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.

5-26

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 3-30.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood.Stay away from the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn it off and geteveryone away from the vehicle until it coolsdown. Wait until there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned. Stopyour engine if it overheats, and get out ofthe vehicle until the engine is cool.


5-27

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” underTowing a Trailer on page 4-38.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let theengine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the window as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park yourvehicle right away.

If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while you’re parked. If you still have thewarning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of thevehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s whatyou’ll see:

A. Coolant Surge Tank B. Engine Cooling Fan

5-28

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should beat least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you mayhave a leak at the surge cap or in the radiator hoses,heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drivethe vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant is not covered by your warranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

5-29

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, but the coolantlevel is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. SeeEngine Coolant on page 5-24 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you would not get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant surge tank is at theFULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.

5-30

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir is located in the frontof the engine compartment on the driver’s side of thevehicle. The cap to the reservoir has this symbol on it.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for more information on location.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTurn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, thenunscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then removethe cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL mark. If necessary,add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-15. Always use the proper fluid. Failure touse the proper fluid can cause leaks and damagehoses and seals.

5-31

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If youwill be operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid thathas sufficient protection against freezing. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoirlocation.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does notclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quartersfull when it is very cold. This allows forexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage your washersystem and paint.

5-32

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid levelin the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brakefluid goes down to an acceptable level during normalbrake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluidlevel goes back up. The other reason is that fluid isleaking out of the brake system. If it is, you shouldhave your brake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, or willnot work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you will have toomuch fluid when you get new brake linings. You shouldadd (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine ishot enough. You or others could be burned,and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brakefluid only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhen to check your brake fluid. See Part C: PeriodicMaintenance Inspections on page 6-13.

5-33

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.

Just look at the brake fluidreservoir. The fluid levelshould be above MIN.If it is not, have your brakesystem checked to seeif there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above the MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-15.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. This will helpkeep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, or theymay not even work at all. This could cause acrash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakesystem parts. For example, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in yourbrake system can damage brake system parts sobadly that they will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See AppearanceCare on page 5-72.

5-34

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make ahigh-pitched warning sound when the brake pads areworn and new pads are needed. The sound may comeand go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving(except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soonyour brakes will not work well. That could leadto an accident. When you hear the brake wearwarning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

See Brake System Inspection on page 6-14.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, your disc brakesadjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehiclewas designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.When you replace parts of your braking system — forexample, when your brake linings wear down and youneed new ones put in — be sure you get new approvedGM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may nolonger work properly. For example, if someone puts inbrake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balancebetween your front and rear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performance you have come toexpect can change in many other ways if someone putsin the wrong replacement brake parts.

5-35

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it istime for a new battery, get one that has the replacementnumber shown on the original battery’s label. Werecommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. Thebattery is located under the rear of the vehicle.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 daysor more, remove the black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youare not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-36for tips on working around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want use anothervehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.

5-36

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that would not be coveredby your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able tostart your vehicle and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put your transmissionin PARK (P) before setting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Always turn off your radio andother accessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or in the accessory power outlets. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This willavoid sparks and help save both batteries. And itcould save your radio.

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminal locations on the other vehicle.Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump startingterminal and a remote negative (−) jump startingterminal. You should always use these remoteterminals instead of the terminals on the battery.

The remote positive (+)terminal is located in theengine compartmenton the passenger’s sideof the vehicle.

Press inward on the tabs located on the outboardsides of the remote positive (+) terminal coverand pull outward to access the terminal.

5-37

The remote negative (−) terminal is located nearthe power steering fluid reservoir. It is marked“GND (−).” See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for more information on location.You will not see the battery of your vehicle underthe hood. It is located on the rear underside ofthe vehicle. You will not need to access the batteryfor jump starting. The remote positive (+) terminalis for that purpose.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You donot need to add water to the battery installedin your new vehicle. But if a battery has fillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.If it is low, add water to take care of that first.If you do not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get itin your eyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical help immediately.

5-38

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could also be damaged, too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Don’t connect positive (+) to the negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts, too. And don’t connectthe negative (−) cable to negative (−) terminal onthe dead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the redpositive (+) cable tothe remote positive (+)terminal location onthe vehicle withthe dead battery. Usea remote positive (+)terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Don’t let the otherend touch metal.Connect it to thepositive (+) terminallocation of the vehiclewith the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminalif the vehicle has one.

5-39

8. Now connect thenegative (−) cableto the negative (−)terminal location ofthe vehicle withthe good battery. Usea remote negative (−)terminal if thevehicle has one.

Don’t let the other end of the cable touchanything until the next step. The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not go to the dead battery.It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehiclewith the dead battery.

9. Connect the other endof the negative (−)cable to the remotenegative (−) terminal,marked GND (−),on the vehicle with thedead battery.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery andrun the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.If it won’t start after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.

5-40

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shorting mayoccur and damage the vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always connectand remove the jumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that the cables do not toucheach other or other metal.

A. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) TerminalB. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote

Negative (−) TerminalsC. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote

Negative (−) Terminal (GND)

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to itsoriginal position.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-41

Rear AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check the rear axlefluid unless there is a leak in the system or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss in the system indicatesthat you have a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm)below the bottom of the filler plug hole.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricantto raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseSee Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-15 for the type of fluid to use.

Headlamp AimingIf your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlampaim may be affected. If you believe your headlampsneed to be re-aimed, we recommend that you takeyour vehicle to the dealer for service. However, itis possible for you to re-aim your headlamps by followingthe procedure in the service manual for your vehicle.

5-42

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper types of bulbs to use, see ReplacementBulbs on page 5-48.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer’s service department.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas insideand can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.You or others could be injured. Be sure toread and follow the instructions on the bulbpackage.

HeadlampsTo replace the headlamp bulbs, do the following:

1. Turn the front wheels as far as they will go in theopposite direction of the bulb that is being changed.

2. Reach underneath the vehicle and locate theheadlamp door. Remove the fastener retainingthe door.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to removeit from the headlamp assembly.There are separate sockets for the high andlow-beam headlamps.

4. Pull the bulb socket out of the headlamp assembly.

5-43

5. Disconnect the bulb socket from the wiring harnessand replace the unit.

6. Reinstall the bulb socket back into the headlampassembly by turning it clockwise.

7. Reinstall the headlamp cover and tighten thefastener.

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker andParking Lamps

Front Turn and Parking LampsTo replace the front turn or parking lamp bulbs, do thefollowing:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11for more information.

2. Locate the bar that runs across the front of thevehicle and remove the two screws located nearthe front of the hood that hold the bar in place.

3. Release the tabs that attach the bar to theheadlamps.

5-44

4. Pull outward on the bar to remove it from thevehicle.

5. Locate and release the tabs behind the grille thathold the lamp assembly in place. Unsnap the tabsand push forward to remove the lamp assembly.

6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to accessthe bulb.

7. Pull the old bulb out of the socket and push in anew bulb.

8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.

5-45

Sidemarker LampsTo replace a sidemarker bulb, do the following:

1. Reach underneath the vehicle to locate thesidemarker bulb.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.


4. Reverse steps to reinstall the bulb socket.

TaillampsTo replace a taillamp bulb, do the following:

1. Reach underneath the rear of the vehicle.

2. Find the bulb socket, twist counterclockwise, andremove it from the lamp assembly.


4. Reinstall the socket into the lamp assembly andturn it clockwise to secure.

5-46

Back-Up LampsTo replace a back-up lamp bulb, do the following:

1. Reach underneath the vehicle near the license plateand find the bulb socket.

2. Remove the socket from the lamp assembly bylocating and then squeezing the release tabwhile turning the socket counterclockwise.

3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and then pulloutward to remove it from the socket.

4. Insert a new bulb into the socket by lining up thenotches on the bulb and turn it clockwise tosecure it.

5. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp assemblyon the vehicle.

5-47

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-up Lamps 2057

Headlamps

High-Beam 9005HB3

Low-Beam H11

Parking Lamps T20

Sidemarker Lamps 194

Taillamps 3157

Turn Signal Lamps T20

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected atleast twice a year for wear and cracking. See “WiperBlade Check” under At Least Twice a Year on page 6-9.

Replacement blades come in different types and areremoved in different ways. For proper type and length,see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 5-91.

Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touchthe windshield when no wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield. Any damagethat occurs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield.

5-48

1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper armuntil it locks into a vertical position.

A. Blade AssemblyB. Arm AssemblyC. Locking Tab

D. Blade PivotE. Hook SlotF. Arm Hook

2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot lockingtab. Pull down on the blade assembly to releaseit from the wiper arm hook.

3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.The insert has two notches at one end that arelocked by bottom claws of the blade assembly.At the notched end, pull the insert from the bladeassembly.

5-49

4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),notched end last, into the end with two bladeclaws (A). Slide the insert all the way through theblade claws at the opposite end (B). The plasticcaps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fullyinserted.

5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottomclaws. Make sure that all other claws are properlylocked on both sides of the insert slots.

A. Claw in NotchB. Correct Installation

C. IncorrectInstallation

6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper armhook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks inthe hook slot.

7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assemblyonto the windshield.

5-50

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questionsabout your tire warranty and where to obtain service,see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additionalinformation refer to the tire manufacturer’s bookletincluded with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-31.



• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,punctured or broken by a sudden impact,such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tiresat the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56 forinflation pressure adjustment for high speeddriving.

5-51

Winter TiresIf you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roadsoften, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.All season tires provide good overall performance onmost surfaces but they may not offer the tractionyou would like or the same level of performance aswinter tires on snow or ice covered roads. If you chooseto use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on allfour wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size as youroriginal equipment tires.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-59.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into thesidewall. The following illustration is an example ofa typical P-Metric tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combinationof letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’swidth, height, aspect ratio, construction type, andservice description. See the Tire Size illustration later inthis section for more detail.

(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPCSpec): Original equipment tires designed to GM’sspecific tire performance criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specificationsmeet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.

5-52

(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date thetire was manufactured. The TIN is molded ontoboth sides of the tire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and numberof plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based onthree performance factors: treadwear, traction,and temperature resistance. For more information,see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-60.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximumload that can be carried and the maximum pressureneeded to support that load. For information onrecommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-56 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows, an example of, a typicalpassenger car tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” asthe first character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates thetire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicatesthe tire height-to-width measurements. For example,if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C,of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewallis 75 percent as high as it is wide.

5-53

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. Theletter “R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D”means diagonal or bias ply construction; and theletter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: The service descriptionindicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratingsrange from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and DefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressureis expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weightof optional accessories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height toits width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may be madefrom steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped bysteel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies arelaid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat fromdriving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehiclewith standard and optional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT code includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which canalso identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-31.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the frontaxle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

5-54

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.There are 6.9 kilopascals (kPa) to one psi.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light dutytrucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curbweight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that faces outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and or model name molding that ishigher or deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passengercars and some light duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure andshown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 5-56 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to atire indicating the maximum speed at which a tirecan operate.

5-55

Traction: The friction between the tire and the roadsurface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contactwith the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of a tirewhen only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See WhenIt Is Time for New Tires on page 5-58.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, atire information system that provides consumerswith ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturersusing government testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 5-60.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg)plus the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-31.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,occupant weight and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to avehicle showing the original equipment tire sizeand recommended inflation pressure. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-31.

Inflation - Tire PressureThe Certification/Tire label or the Tire and LoadingInformation label shows the correct inflation pressuresfor your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or drivenno more than 1 mile (1.6 km). See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-31, for examples of these labels andwhere they are located on your vehicle. If you’ll bedriving at high speeds (speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h)or higher), where it is legal, set the cold inflationpressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown onthe tire sidewall, or to 35 psi (244 kPa), whicheveris lower. See the example below. When you end thishigh-speed driving, return to the cold inflation pressureshown on the Certification/Tire label or the Tire andLoading Information Label.

Example:

You’ll find maximum load and inflation pressure moldedon the tire’s sidewall, in small letters near the rimflange. It will read something like this: Maximum load690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.

For this example, you would set the inflation pressurefor high-speed driving at 35 psi (244 kPa) for thefront and rear tires.

5-56

Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflationor overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tiresdon’t have enough air (underinflation), you can getthe following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Bad wear• Bad handling• Bad fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), youcan get the following:• Unusual wear• Bad handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road hazards

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflatedsimply by looking at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they’re underinflated.

Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tiresare cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven no more than1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Pressthe tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matchesthe recommended pressure on the Certification/Tire labelor the Tire and Loading Information label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on themetal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt andmoisture.

Tire Inspection and RotationThe tires on your vehicle are different sizes front to rear.Due to this, your tires should not be rotated. Each tireand wheel should be used only in the position it is in.

Check your tires and wheels regularly for unusual wearand damage. Also see, Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-5, When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-58and Wheel Replacement on page 5-62.

5-57

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’stime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining. Somecommercial truck tiresmay not have treadwearindicators.

You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage thatcan’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

5-58

Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires your vehicleneeds, look at the Certification/Tire label or the Tire andLoading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-31, for examples of these labels andwhere they are located on your vehicle.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new hada Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get newtires, GM recommends that you get tires with that sameTPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continueto have tires that are designed to give proper endurance,handling, load range, speed rating, traction, ride, tirepressure monitoring system performance and otherthings during normal service on your vehicle. If your tireshave an all-season tread design, the TPC number willbe followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).

If you ever replace your tires with those not having aTPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizes(other than those originally installed on yourvehicle) or types (radial and bias-belted tires),the vehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes (other than those originally installed onyour vehicle) may also cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use the correct size andtype tires on all four wheels.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

5-59

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable on thetire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration, which grades tires bytreadwear, traction and temperature performance. (Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The grades are molded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Gradingsystem does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to federal safetyrequirements and additional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance. Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-60

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generationof heat and its ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.

If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pullingone way or the other, the alignment may need tobe reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating whendriving on a smooth road, your wheels may need tobe rebalanced.

5-61

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should bereplaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to thebody and chassis.

5-62

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause a crash. When you changea wheel, remove any rust or dirt from placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, you can use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure to use a scraperor wire brush later, if you need to, to get allthe rust or dirt off.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or thethreads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheelnuts might come loose and the wheel couldfall off, causing a crash.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to becomeloose and even come off. This could lead to acrash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.If you have to replace them, be sure to get newGM original equipment wheel nuts.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification.

5-63

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it has beenused or how far it has been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes, suspension orother vehicle parts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may be injuredin a crash. Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combination androad conditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions. To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle, and donot spin your wheels. If you do find tractiondevices that will fit, install them on therear tires.

5-64

If a Tire Goes FlatYour vehicle has no spare tire, no tire changingequipment and no place to store a tire.

It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. SeeTires on page 5-51. If air goes out of a tire, it’s muchmore likely to leak out slowly. But if you shouldever have a “blow out” here are a few tips about what toexpect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much likea skid and may require the same correction you’duse in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove your footfrom the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under controlby steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage bydriving slowly to a level place and stopping. Then do this:

1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.2. Set the parking brake firmly.3. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Turn off the engine.5. Inspect the flat tire.

If the tire has been separated from the wheel or hasdamaged sidewalls or large tears that allow rapidair loss, call a tire repair facility. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-5.

If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nail orother similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit may be usedto repair the damaged tire temporarily. The kit uses aliquid tire sealant to seal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire. The flat tire is then inflated to at least26 psi (179 kPa) and driven to evenly distribute the tiresealant. The tire pressure is checked after driving for amaximum of 10 minutes to see if the slow leak has beenstopped. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (131 kPa) or more,inflate the tire up to the standard operating pressure asshown on the tire and loading information label found oncenter pillar near the door latch or on the rear edge of thedriver’s door. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56.

You should have the damaged tire repaired as soon aspossible. The tire sealant is a temporary repair only.For more information regarding the tire inflator kitsee Tire Inflator Kit on page 5-66.

Notice: If the tire pressure has dropped below19 psi (131 kPa), the vehicle should not be driven.Damage to the tire may be severe and the sealantwill not be effective. Contact Roadside Assistance,see Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.

5-65

Tire Inflator KitYour vehicle is equipped with a tire inflator kit. It islocated behind the driver’s seat of your vehicle. Use thefollowing directions for use of your tire inflator kitinstead of directions you may find on or near the kit.The repair kit contains the following:

A. Air CompressorB. Tire SealantC. Sealant Filling HoseD. Air Compressor

Accessory PlugE. Air Compressor

Inflator Hose

F. Air Pressure GageG. Sealant Filling

Hose PlugH. Valve Core RemoverI. Spare Valve CoreJ. 55 mph (90 km/h)

Label

Accessing the Tire Inflator KitTo access the tire inflator kit for use, do the following:

1. Loosen the two nuts holding the tire inflator kit coverin place.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Grasp the handle and pull the tire inflator kit out.

4. Open the tire inflator kit case by lifting up thetwo tabs located on either side of the kit handle.

5-66

Tire SealantThe kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected intoa flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holes or cutsin the tread area of the tire. The tire sealant cannotrepair tire damage caused while driving on a flat tire ora tire that has had a “blow out” or a tire that haspunctures in the sidewall areas. The tire sealant solutionis a one-time use application for one tire only. Checkthe tire sealant expiration date; the sealant may not beas effective beyond the expiration date. The tiresealant can be peeled off easily after drying.

Using Tire SealantBefore using the tire sealant, be sure the valve stemarea is clean and free of debris, such as mud, snow, ice,brake dust, etc. The valve stem should be located atthe bottom of the tire before applying the tire sealant.

To apply the tire sealant, do the following:

1. Turn the valve cap on the tire valvecounterclockwise to remove it.

2. Remove the valve core using the valve core toolprovided in the tire inflator kit. An extra valve coreis also provided in the kit.

3. Shake the bottle to make sure the sealant is wellmixed.

4. Attach the tire sealant filling hose to the bottle oftire sealant to pierce the seal on the bottle.

5. Remove the sealing plug from the end of the fillinghose and insert the end of the hose over the tirevalve.

6. Hold the bottle upside down over the tire valve andsqueeze the sealant into the tire until the bottle isempty.

7. Remove the sealant filling hose from the tire valveand reinstall the sealing plug.

8. Insert the valve core back into the tire valve. Turnvalve core tool clockwise to secure the valve core.

Once the tire sealant is applied, you can use thecompressor to inflate the tire.

5-67

Air Compressor

A. Inflating HoseB. Air Pressure Gage

C. ON/OFF SwitchD. Air Compressor Plug

The air compressor included in the tire inflator kit wasdesigned exclusively for your vehicle. After the sealanthas been injected into the flat tire, use the air compressorto inflate the flat tire. Follow these instructions:

1. Put the transmission in PARK (P) and apply theparking brake. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 2-20 and Parking Brake on page 2-19.

2. Attach the nozzle on the compressor to the valvestem of the flat tire, and then insert the plug intoan accessory power outlet on your vehicle.

5-68

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine in a closed-in place or withthe climate control system off can causedeadly carbon monoxide (CO). See EngineExhaust on page 2-22.

Notice: The car engine must be running toavoid draining the battery while running theair compressor.

3. Start your vehicle.

4. Turn the compressor on to inflate the tire.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can make itexplode, and you or others could be injured.Be sure to read the inflator instructions, andinflate the tire to its recommended pressure.Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).

5-69

5. Inflate the tire to atleast 26 psi (179 kPa),but not more than36 psi (248 kPa).

Notice: If the air compressor runs for morethan six minutes, at a time, it may overheat.The excessive heat could damage the compressor.Always operate the compressor for six minutesor less when inflating a tire.

6. Inflate the tire forup to a maximumof six minutes.

Notice: If 26 psi (179 kPa) tire pressure cannot bereached after six minutes the vehicle should notbe driven further. Damage to the tire is severe andthe sealant will not be effective. Remove the aircompressor plug from the accessory power outletand unscrew the inflating hose from the tirevalve. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.

7. If 26 psi (179 kPa) tire pressure is reached insix minutes or less, disconnect the air compressor.

5-70

8. Attach the enclosedmaximum speed labelto the inside upperleft corner of thewindshield or to theface of the radio/clock.

The maximum speed label reminds you to drivecautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h)until you have the damaged tire inspectedand repaired.

9. Drive the vehicle immediately to distribute the tiresealant evenly inside the tire.

10. After driving for 10 minutes, recheck the tirepressure. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (131 kPa) ormore, inflate the tire to the standard operatingpressure as shown on the Certification/Tire labellocated on the edge of the driver’s door.If the tire pressure has dropped below 19 psi(131 kPa), do not continue to drive the vehicle.The tire is severely damaged and the tire sealantwill not be effective. Repair or replace the tireas soon as possible.

5-71

Tire Inflator Kit StorageThe tire inflator kit is stored behind the driver’s seatin your vehicle. To reinstall the kit after use, dothe following:

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire inflator kit or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of the vehiclecould cause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment could strikesomeone. Store the tire inflator kit in theproper place.

1. Place the air compressor pump and accessoriesinto the inflator kit case.

2. Move the driver’s seat forward and tilt the seatbackforward out of the way.

3. Place the cover over the tire inflator kit.4. Hold the kit with the cover on against the back wall

of the passenger compartment in the designatedstorage area as you perform the next step.

5. Reinstall the two nuts holding the tire inflator kitcover in place.

Appearance CareCleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a matchis struck near them or if they get on a hot part of thevehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaledin an enclosed space. When anything from a containeris used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow themanufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always openthe doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaningthe inside.

Never use these to clean the vehicle:

• Benzene

• Naphtha

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Acetone

• Paint Thinner

• Turpentine

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more thanothers —and they can all damage the vehicle, too.

5-72

Do not use any of these products unless this manualsays you can. In many uses, these will damagethe vehicle:

• Alcohol

• Laundry Soap

• Bleach

• Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust andloose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and paintedsurfaces with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning Fabric/CarpetYour dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric andcarpet. They will clean normal spots and stains verywell. You can get GM approved cleaning products fromyour dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materialson page 5-79.

Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

• Clean up stains as soon as you can — beforethey set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a cleanarea often. A soft brush may be used if stains arestubborn.

• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Cleaner on Fabric1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any

loose dirt.

2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.

3. Follow the directions on the container label.

4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturatethe material and don’t rub it roughly.

5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use asponge to remove any excess cleaner.

6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampenedtowel or cloth.

7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

5-73

Special Fabric Cleaning ProblemsStains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urineand blood can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge thesoiled area with cool water.

2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructionsdescribed earlier.

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking sold to 1 cup (250 ml)of lukewarm water.

4. Let dry.

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chilisauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. First, clean with cool water and allow to drycompletely.

3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructionsdescribed earlier.

Cleaning VinylUse warm water and a clean cloth.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.You may have to do this more than once.

• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain ifyou don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean clothand vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Cleaning LeatherUse a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, letthe leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.

• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleanedimmediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,it can harm the leather.

5-74

Cleaning the Top of the InstrumentPanelUse only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containing siliconesor waxes may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic ComponentsUse only a mild soap and water solution on a softcloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect thesurface finish.

Cleaning Glass SurfacesGlass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner ora liquid household glass cleaner will remove normaltobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-79.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you couldscratch the glass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger and the integrated radioantenna. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,it may severely weaken them. In a crash,they might not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather frequent application may be required.

Cleaning the Outside of Your VehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depthof color, gloss retention and durability.

5-75

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep itclean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,removing all soap residue completely. You can getGM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-79.Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on thesurface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enteryour vehicle.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that does not have enoughclearance for the wide rear tires and wheels, youcould damage your vehicle. Verify with the managerof the car wash that your vehicle will fit beforeentering the car wash or use a touchless car wash.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from thepaint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 5-79.

Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., candamage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

5-76

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. You can help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keeptheir luster. Washing with water is all that is usuallyneeded. However, you may use chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damagingprotective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for allbright metal parts.

Cleaning the Windshield and WiperBladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,wax, sap or other material may be on the blade orwindshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strengthglass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beadsdo not form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper bladesand affect their performance. Clean the blade bywiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strengthwindshield washer solvent. Then rinse the bladewith water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;replace blades that look worn.

Cleaning Aluminum WheelsKeep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth withmild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

5-77

Cleaning TiresTo clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finishshould be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrodequickly and may develop into major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your GM dealer. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer’sbody and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into thepaint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-78

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oiland asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

5-79

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.This code will help you identify your engine,specifications and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box.It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.On this label is:

• your VIN,

• the model designation,

• paint information and

• a list of all production options and specialequipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

5-80

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Don’t add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicleand the damage wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cankeep other components from working as theyshould.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle,see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 1-52.

HeadlampsThe headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuitbreaker. An electrical overload will cause the lampsto go on and off, or in some cases to remain off.If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checkedright away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuitbreaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavysnow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows and otherpower accessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting thecircuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

5-81

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces the chance of firescaused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t havea spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the sameamperage. Just pick some feature of your vehiclethat you can get along without — like the radio orcigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correctamperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

Center Console Fuse Block

The center console fuseblock is located on thecenter console betweenthe two seats.

To remove the fuse block cover and access the fuses,do the following:

1. Move the passenger’s seat all the way forward andtilt the seatback forward. See Power Seats onpage 1-2 and Seatback Latches on page 1-6 formore information.

2. Pull the handle on the fuse block cover toward youand then slide it to the side. You will then be ableto remove the cover completely.

3. To reinstall the cover, slide it to the side until it islined up with the access hole. Then, push on thefuse panel cover until it latches into place.

5-82

Fuses Usage

03 Rear Window Defogger

04 Truck Body Controller

05 Rear Window Defogger

06 Driver Seat Module


09 Blank

10 Driver’s Door Module, Power Mirrors

11 Amplifier

12 Blank

13 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

14 Driver’s Side Rear Parking Lamp

15 Accessory Power Outlets

16 Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp

17 Passenger’s Side Rear ParkingLamp

19 Blank

20 Blank

21 Locks

22 Blank

23 Blank

5-83

Fuses Usage

25 Blank

26 Blank

27 HomeLink® System

28 Roof Door Module

29 Blank


32 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

33 Windshield Wipers

34 Stoplamps

35 Blank

36 Climate Control System,Driver’s Door Unlock

37 Front Parking Lamps

38 Driver’s Side Turn Signal

39 Climate Control System


41 Radio

42 Trailer Parking Lamps

43 Passenger’s Side Turn Signal

44 Blank

Fuses Usage

46 Accessory Power Outlets

47 Ignition

48 Blank

49 Blank

50 Truck Body Controller, Ignition

51 Brakes

52 Blank

Relays Usage

18 Locks

24 Unlock

30 Parking Lamps

45 Rear Window Defogger,Outside Power Heated Mirrors

CircuitBreakers Usage

01 Roof & Door Module

02 Roof Pump

08 Power Seats

5-84

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The fuse block is locatedunder the hood in theengine compartment onthe driver’s side ofthe vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

To remove the fuse block cover and access the fuses,do the following:

1. To remove the primary fuse block cover, press inon the two locking tabs and then lift the cover off.

2. Lift up on the secondary cover to remove it.

3. Reverse the steps to reinstall the covers.

Fuses Usage

1 Air Conditioning

2 Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control System

3 Canister, Fuel System

4 Ignition

5 Starter

5-85

Fuses Usage

6 Ignition

7 Driver’s Side High Beam Headlamp

8 Passenger’s Side High BeamHeadlamp

9 Ignition

10 Instrument Panel Cluster, DriverInformation Center (DIC)

11 Driver’s Side Low Beam Headlamp

12 Passenger’s Side Low BeamHeadlamp

13 Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

14 Air Bag System


16 Truck Body Control, Ignition

17 Driver’s Side Stoplamp/Turn Signals

18 Passenger’s Side Stoplamp/Turn Signals

19 Back-up Lamps

20 Throttle Actuator Control (TAC)

21 Fog Lamps

Fuses Usage

22 Horn

23 Injector A

24 Injector B

25 Oxygen Sensor A

26 Oxygen Sensor B

27 Windshield Washer

28 Cigarette Lighter

29 Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

30 Blank

31 Cargo Cover Release

32 Hazard Warning Flashers

33 Stoplamps

44 Engine Cooling Fan

45 Climate Control Fan

46 Ignition A

47 Ignition B

48 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

49 Body Fuse

5-86

Relays Usage

34 Air Conditioning

35 Fuel Pump

36 Fog Lamps

37 High Beam Headlamps

38 Cargo Cover Release

39 Horn

40 Windshield Washer

41 Headlamp Driver Module

42 Ignition

43 Starter

Relay CenterThere is a relay center located in the area where theconvertible top is stored when it is open. To access therelay center, do the following:

1. Open the convertible top until the roof tonneau andthe boot cover panel are upright so that you canreach into the convertible top storage area asshown. See “Convertible Top Operation” underConvertible Top on page 2-37 for more information.

5-87

2. Locate the water-tight box that houses the relaycenter and remove the four nuts that secure thecover to the backside of the passengercompartment.

3. Press in the tabs on the sides of the cover and liftto remove the cover.

4. Locate the relay center inside the box. It is locatedtoward the driver’s side of the vehicle.

5. Press in the tabs at each end of the relay centercover and lift to remove.

6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the relay center coverand close the water-tight box.

5-88

Following is a list ofrelays contained inthe relay center.

Relays Usage

e Driver’s Door Lock

RT DRL Passenger’s Side DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL)

LT DRL Driver’s Side DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL)

= Rear Window Defogger

5-89

Capacities and SpecificationsRefer to Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-15 for more information. All capacities areapproximate. When adding fluids, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.Recheck the fluid level after filling.

Capacities and SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

5.3L V8 T M30 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air conditioning Refrigerant R-134a 2.8 lbs. 1.27 kg

Cooling System 15.3 quarts 14.5 L

Differential Fluid 4.0 quarts 6.6 L

Engine Oil with Filter 6.0 quarts 5.7 L

Fuel Tank 25.0 gallons 94.6 L

Rear Axle 2.4 quarts 2.3 L

Transmission(Drain and Refill) 5.0 quarts 4.7 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft-lbs. 140 Y

5-90

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part Number

Automatic Transmission Filter Kit 24200796**

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterA2014C*

15036141**

Engine Oil FilterPF44*

25010633**

Fuel FilterGF831*

88983068**

Spark Plugs41–985*

12571164**

Windshield Wiper Blade 20.0 inches (50.8 cm)

*ACDelco® part number**GM part number

5-91

✍ NOTES

5-92

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2How This Section is Organized .........................6-3Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-4Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-5Part B: Owner Checks and Services .................6-9At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9

At Least Twice a Year ....................................6-9At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-13Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle

Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-13Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-13Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-13Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-14Brake System Inspection ................................6-14Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-15Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-17

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealerfor details.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. Improper vehicle maintenance caneven affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improperfluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increasethe level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protectour environment, and to keep your vehicle in goodcondition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Maintenance RequirementsMaintenance intervals, checks, inspections andrecommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in thismanual are necessary to keep your vehicle in goodworking condition. Any damage caused by failureto follow scheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.

6-2

How This Section is OrganizedThis maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explainswhat to have done and how often. Some of theseservices can be complex, so unless you are technicallyqualified and have the necessary equipment, you shouldlet your GM dealer’s service department do these jobs.

Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supportedservice people that will perform the work using genuineGM parts.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,you can be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper tools andequipment for the job. If you have any doubt,have a qualified technician do the work.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information on page 7-9.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells youwhat should be checked and when. It also explains whatyou can easily do to help keep your vehicle in goodcondition.

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explainsimportant inspections that your dealer’s servicedepartment can perform for you.

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some recommended products necessary to helpkeep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,or their equivalents, should be used whether you dothe work yourself or have it done.

“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you torecord and keep track of the maintenance performedon your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warrantyrepairs.

6-3

Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServicesThis part contains engine oil scheduled maintenancewhich explains the engine oil life system and howit indicates when to change the engine oil and filter.Also, listed are scheduled maintenance services whichare to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you to keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive shortdistances only a few times a week. Or you may drivelong distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Oryou may drive it to work, to do errands or in manyother ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services you shouldhave done and when to schedule them.

When you go to your dealer for your service needs,you will know that GM-trained and supported servicepeople will perform the work using GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed inPart D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle usesthem. All parts should be replaced and all necessaryrepairs done before you or anyone else drives thevehicle.

These schedules are for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these limits on the tire andloading information label. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-31.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withindriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-5.

6-4

Scheduled MaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life ofthis vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same intervalafter 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of thisvehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections onpage 6-13.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined thatthe failure to perform this maintenance item willnot nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however, urge that all recommended maintenanceservices be performed at the indicated intervals andthe maintenance be recorded.

Engine Oil Scheduled MaintenanceChange engine oil and filter as indicated by theGM Oil Life System (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). Reset the system.

Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil and filter. This is based onengine revolutions and engine temperature, and not onmileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change will be indicated can varyconsiderably. For the oil life system to work properly, youmust reset the system every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.A CHANGE ENGINE OIL light will come on. Changeyour oil as soon as possible within the next two times youstop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are driving under thebest conditions, the oil life system may not indicate thatan oil change is necessary for over a year. However, yourengine oil and filter must be changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must be reset. Your dealerhas GM-trained service people who will perform this workusing genuine GM parts and reset the system.

It is also important to check your oil regularly and keepit at the proper level.

6-5

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since yourlast oil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil onpage 5-14 for information on resetting the system.

An Emission Control Service.

See the mileage intervals following for additionalservices that may be performed with an engine oilchange. After the services are performed, record thedate, odometer reading and who performed the serviceon the maintenance record pages in Part E of thisschedule.

7,500 Miles (12 500 km)❑ Check rear axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace

the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect filter at every engine oil change. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20 for more information.An Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Check rear axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.


30,000 Miles (50 000 km)❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the

vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.❑ Check rear axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.

(See footnote †.)❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20 for more information.An Emission Control Service.

6-6






60,000 Miles (100 000 km)❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.❑ Check rear axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.

(See footnote †.)❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air







6-7

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)❑ Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the

vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.❑ Check rear axle fluid level and add fluid as needed.❑ Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.

(See Footnote †.)❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air



100,000 Miles (166 000 km)❑ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control

Service.❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every

60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for what to use.Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressurecap and neck. Pressure test the cooling systemand pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.

❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An EmissionControl Service.

6-8

Part B: Owner Checks and ServicesListed in this part are owner checks and serviceswhich should be performed at the intervals specifiedto help ensure the safety, dependability and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, asshown in Part D.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important for you or a service station attendantto perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for furtherdetails.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 5-24 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-32 for furtherdetails.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inspection and Inflation CheckVisually inspect your tires for wear and make suretires are inflated to the correct pressures. See Tireson page 5-51 for further details.

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System CheckMake sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare working properly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. If you see anythingthat might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safetybelts replaced.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bagsystem does not need regular maintenance.)

6-9

Wiper Blade CheckInspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replaceblade inserts that appear worn or damaged or thatstreak or miss areas of the windshield. Also seeCleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-75.

Weatherstrip LubricationSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather more frequent application may berequired. See Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-15.

Automatic Transmission CheckCheck the transmission fluid level; add if needed. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-21. A fluid lossmay indicate a problem. Check the system and repairif needed.

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricantspecified in Part D.

Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all body door and fuel door hinges, latchesand locks, including the glove box and consoledoors, the body hood, secondary latch, pivots, springanchor, release pawl and any moving seat hardware.Lubricate the hood safety lever pivot and prop rod pivot.Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment.

6-10

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-19if necessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The startershould work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in any other position, yourvehicle needs service.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on a levelsurface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-19 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediatelyif the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUNposition, but do not start the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicleneeds service.

6-11

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position.

• The key should turn to OFF only when the shiftlever is in PARK (P).

• The key should come out only in OFF.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) MechanismCheck

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others couldbe injured and property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in front of yourvehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready toapply the regular brake at once should thevehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With theengine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N),slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parkingbrake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Thenrelease the parking brake followed by the regularbrake.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and otherdebris can collect.

6-12

Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspectionsListed in this part are inspections and services whichshould be performed at least twice a year (for instance,each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’sservice department do these jobs. Make sure anynecessary repairs are completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services may befound in a service manual. See Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-9.

Steering, Suspension and FrontDrive Axle Boot and Seal InspectionInspect the front and rear suspension and steeringsystem for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs ofwear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steeringlines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect thedrive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage.Replace seals if necessary.

Exhaust System InspectionInspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the bodynear the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,holes, loose connections or other conditions whichcould cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could letexhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhauston page 2-22.

Fuel System InspectionInspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.

6-13

Engine Cooling System InspectionInspect the hoses and have them replaced if theyare cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean theoutside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test ofthe cooling system and pressure cap is recommendedat least once a year.

Brake System InspectionInspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parkingbrake adjustment. You may need to have your brakesinspected more often if your driving habits orconditions result in frequent braking.

6-14

Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meetsGM Standard GM6094M anddisplays the American PetroleumInstitute Certified for GasolineEngines starburst symbol.To determine the proper viscosityfor your vehicle’s engine, seeEngine Oilon page 5-14.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and useonly DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 5-24.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.


WindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-PurposeLubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

6-15


Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90Synthetic Axle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch,Pivots, SpringAnchor and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges, Fuel

Filler Door andFolding Seats



Tailgate HandlePivot Points,

Hinges, LatchBolt andLinkage


WeatherstripConditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Grease withTeflon, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).

6-16

Part E: Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service andany additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following recordpages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record

6-17

Maintenance Record (cont’d)


6-18



6-19



6-20

Customer Assistance Information ......................7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-3Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities ..................................................7-5Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-5Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7

Reporting Safety Defects ..................................7-8Reporting Safety Defects to the United States

Government ...............................................7-8Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ...............................................7-9Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .......7-9Service Publications Ordering Information ...........7-9

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7-1

Customer AssistanceInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, contactthe Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of CanadaCustomer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please havethe following information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of the instrument panel andvisible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealerare committed to making sure you are completelysatisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with theGM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additionalrights you may have. Canadian owners refer toyour Warranty and Owner Assistance Informationbooklet for information on the Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

7-2

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you may be required toresort to this informal dispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of the program is free ofcharge and your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephonenumber or write them at the following address:

BBB Auto LineCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. Specific vehicle information can be found inone place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner’s manual (United States only).

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members (United States only).

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicatewith Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTYusers in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishesto write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed toChevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-51701-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

7-4

GM Mobility Program for Personswith Disabilities

This program, available toqualified applicants, canreimburse you up to$1,000 toward eligibleaftermarket driver orpassenger adaptiveequipment that may berequired for your vehicle,such as hand controls,wheelchair/scooterlifts, etc.

This program can also provide you with free resourceinformation, such as area driver assessment centers andmobility equipment installers. The offer is available fora limited period of time from the date of vehiclepurchase/lease. For more details, or to determine yourvehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call theGM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Texttelephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY userscall 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramTo enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customersatisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce theestablishment of the Chevrolet Roadside AssistanceCenter. As the owner of a 2003 Chevrolet, membershipin Roadside Assistance is free.

Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872). This toll-free number will provide youover-the-phone roadside assistance with minormechanical problems. If your problem cannot beresolved over the phone, our advisors have access to anationwide network of dealer recommended serviceproviders. Roadside membership is free; however someservices may incur costs.

Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,Basic Care and Courtesy Care:

Roadside Basic Care provides:

• Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438

• Free towing for warranty repairs

• Basic over-the-phone technical advice

• Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e.,wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glassrepair, etc.)

7-5

Roadside Courtesy Care provides:

• Roadside Basic Care services (as outlinedpreviously)Plus:

• FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealerfrom a legal roadway)

• FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are loston the road or locked inside)

• FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)

• FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)

• FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered onthe road)

Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customersneeding warranty service. Courtesy Transportationwill be offered in conjunction with the coverage providedby the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle LimitedWarranty to eligible purchasers of 2003 Chevroletpassenger cars and light duty trucks. (See your sellingdealer for details.)

Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail leasecustomers operating 2003 and newer Chevrolet vehiclesfor a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services mustbe pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealerservice management.

Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or includedin the coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to modify ordiscontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care at any time.

The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies thatwill provide you with quality and priority service.When roadside services are required, our advisors willexplain any payment obligations that may be incurredfor utilizing outside services.

For prompt assistance when calling, please have thefollowing available to give to the advisor;

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• License plate number

• Vehicle color

• Vehicle location

• Telephone number where you can be reached

• Vehicle mileage

• Description of problem

Canadian Roadside AssistanceVehicles purchased in Canada have an extensiveRoadside Assistance program accessible from anywherein Canada or the United States. Please refer to theWarranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

7-6

Courtesy TransportationChevrolet has always exemplified quality and value inits offering of motor vehicles. To enhance yourownership experience, we and our participating dealersare proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customersupport program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retailpurchase/lease customers in conjunction with theBumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation optionsare available when warranty repairs are required. This willreduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

Plan Ahead When PossibleWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advisingyour service consultant of your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, letthem know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicleoff for service, you are urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolethelps minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includes aone way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles fromthe dealership.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,reimbursement up to $30 per day (five day maximum)may be available for the use of public transportationsuch as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative,reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

7-7

Courtesy Rental VehicleWhen your vehicle is unavailable due to overnightwarranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for arental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to amaximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. Thisrequires that you sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state, local and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements, insurance coverage, creditcard, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage chargesand may also be responsible for taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it isnot part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Aseparate booklet entitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participatingdealers and all program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at every dealer. Please

contact you dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangementswill be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the GeneralMotors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,alternative transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation Program. Please consultyour dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

7-8

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer, orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inthe Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaPlace de Ville Tower C330 Sparks StreetOttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you will notifyGeneral Motors. Please call the Chevrolet CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

7-9

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, and specifications forGM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motors carsand trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.In Canada, information pertaining to ProductService Bulletins can be obtained by contacting yourGeneral Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner’s manual will includethe Maintenance Schedule for all models.In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, andWarranty Booklet.RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for current andpast model GM vehicles. To request an order form,please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP. O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

7-10

AAccessing the Tire Inflator Kit ........................... 5-66Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-16Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-32Additional Program Information ........................... 7-8Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-81Add-On Equipment .......................................... 4-37Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ...... 3-62, 3-71Airbag

Off Light ..................................................... 3-26Readiness Light .......................................... 3-25

Airbag Systems .............................................. 1-40Airbag Off Switch ........................................ 1-48How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-46Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-52What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-46What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-47When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-45Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-42

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20Air Compressor .............................................. 5-68Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-18AM ............................................................... 3-81Antenna, Integrated Windshield ......................... 3-81Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-6Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-29

Appearance Care ............................................ 5-72Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-75Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-78Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-73Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-75Finish Damage ............................................ 5-78Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-78Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-78Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-79Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-75

Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-17Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-58

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-80Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-81Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-81Integrated Windshield Antenna ....................... 3-81Radio with CD ............................................ 3-59Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-68Setting the Time .......................................... 3-59Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-80Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-81

Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-12Automatic Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-21Operation ................................................... 2-17

Automatic Transmission Check .......................... 6-10Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control

System Check ............................................. 6-11Auxiliary Gage Package ................................... 3-38

1

BBacking Up .................................................... 4-47Battery .......................................................... 5-36Battery Not Charging ....................................... 3-45Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-6Battery Rundown Protection ............................. 3-15Battery Voltage Too High ................................. 3-45Battery Voltage Too Low .................................. 3-45Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-10Brake

Parking ...................................................... 2-19System Inspection ....................................... 6-14System Warning Light .................................. 3-28

Brake Adjustment ............................................ 5-35Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-33Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 5-35Brake Wear ................................................... 5-35Brakes .......................................................... 5-33Braking ........................................................... 4-6Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-14Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-43

Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-47Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-44Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-43Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-42

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Headlamps ................................................. 5-43Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-48Taillamps .................................................... 5-46

Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-59

CCalifornia Fuel .................................................. 5-6Canada — Customer Assistance ......................... 7-4Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCanadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-6Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-90Carbon Monoxide ..................... 2-9, 2-22, 4-26, 4-38Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-75Your CD Player ........................................... 3-81Your CDs ................................................... 3-81

Cargo Area Rails ............................................ 2-35Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-32Cargo Cover Ajar ............................................ 3-45Cargo Cover Storage System ........................... 2-35Cargo Net System .......................................... 2-36Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-35CD Messages ........................................ 3-68, 3-80Center Console Fuse Block .............................. 5-82Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-31Center Console Switchbank .............................. 3-16

2

Certification/Tire Label ..................................... 4-35Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-64Change Trans (Transmission) Fluid .................... 3-46Charging System Light .................................... 3-27Check

Engine Light ............................................... 3-30Gages Warning Light ................................... 3-36

Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-30Check Oil Level .............................................. 3-46Checking Brake Fluid ...................................... 5-34Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-26Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-14Checking the Automatic Transmission

Fluid Level ................................................. 5-23Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-78Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-25Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-22Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-31Older Children ............................................. 1-20Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System ........................................ 1-33

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger

Seat Position ........................................... 1-36Top Strap ................................................... 1-29Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-31

Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-17Cleaning

Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-73Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-75Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-78Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-75

Cleaning Aluminum Wheels .............................. 5-77Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-76Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-73Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-75Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-75Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-74Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-75Cleaning the Windshield and Wiper Blades ......... 5-77Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-78Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-74Climate Control System ................................... 3-18

Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-21Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-12

3

Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5Convertible Top .............................................. 2-37Convertible Top Operation ................................ 2-38Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-30Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26

Cooling System .............................................. 5-28Cruise Control .................................................. 3-8Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-35Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-31Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-10Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities ................................................ 7-5Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ...... 7-9Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ................................ 7-9Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .......................... 7-8Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5Service Publications Ordering Information ......... 7-9

Customizing Your Automatic Door Locks Feature ..... 2-9

DDaytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-13Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-20Depress Brake ............................................... 3-46Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4Door

Locks .......................................................... 2-7Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-12

Driver Door Ajar ............................................. 3-46Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-41

DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-41DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-52DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-45

Driver’s Seat .................................................... 1-2Driving

At Night ..................................................... 4-15City ........................................................... 4-20Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2Freeway ..................................................... 4-21Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17Winter ........................................................ 4-26

4

Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-47Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-26Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-19Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-19Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-46

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-81Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-82Headlamps ................................................. 5-81Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-81Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-81

Emergency Cargo Cover Release Handle ........... 2-34Emissions Inspection and Maintenance

Programs ................................................... 3-33Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-20Battery ....................................................... 5-36Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-35Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-30Compartment Overview ................................ 5-12Coolant ...................................................... 5-24Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-30Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-14Cover ........................................................ 5-19Exhaust ..................................................... 2-22Oil ............................................................. 5-14

Engine (cont.)Overheating ................................................ 5-27Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-36Starting ...................................................... 2-16

Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................... 5-85Engine Coolant Hot Idle Engine ........................ 3-46Engine Coolant Level Check .............................. 6-9Engine Cover Insert ........................................ 5-19Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-17Engine Oil Level Check ..................................... 6-9Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance ..................... 6-5Engine Overheated Stop Engine ....................... 3-47Erasing HomeLink® Buttons .............................. 2-30Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-14Express Down Window .................................... 2-11Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-19Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-11

FFan Knob ...................................................... 3-19Filter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station ....... 3-63, 3-72Finding a Station .................................... 3-60, 3-69Finish Care .................................................... 5-76Finish Damage ............................................... 5-78Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-6Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-65

5

Flip Hall Switch Fault ...................................... 3-47Fluid

Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-21Power Steering ........................................... 5-31Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-32

FM ............................................................... 3-81Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-13Following Distance .......................................... 4-46Footnotes ........................................................ 6-5Front Map Lamps ........................................... 3-15Front Turn and Parking Lamps ......................... 5-44Fuel ............................................................... 5-5

Additives ...................................................... 5-7California Fuel .............................................. 5-6Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7Gage ......................................................... 3-37Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6System Inspection ....................................... 6-13

Fuel Information .............................................. 3-43

Fuel Level Low ............................................... 3-47Fuses

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-82Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-81

GGage

Check Gages Warning Light .......................... 3-36Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-30Fuel .......................................................... 3-37Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-34Speedometer .............................................. 3-24Tachometer ................................................. 3-24

Gage, Auxiliary Package .................................. 3-38Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-26Gasoline

Octane ........................................................ 5-5Specifications ............................................... 5-6

Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-29Glove Box ..................................................... 2-31GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities .................................................... 7-5

6

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-3Hdr (Header) Latch Switch Fault ....................... 3-47Headlamp

Aiming ....................................................... 5-42Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-6Headlamps .................................................... 5-43

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-43Electrical System ......................................... 5-81Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-44Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-43

Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4Heater ........................................................... 3-18Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-36Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24Hitches .......................................................... 4-42HomeLink Transmitter, Programming .................. 2-27HomeLink® Wireless Control System ................. 2-26Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10Release ..................................................... 5-11

Horn ............................................................... 3-4How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid .......... 5-24

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank ................................................. 5-30

How to Check ................................................ 5-57How to Check Lubricant ................................... 5-42How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-31How to Check the Automatic

Transmission Fluid ....................................... 5-22How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 5-20How to Use This Manual ...................................... iiHow to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-12Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-18

IIf No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-28If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-27If the Light is Flashing ..................................... 3-32If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-32If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-28If You Decide To Pull A Trailer .......................... 4-39Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-15Ignition Transmission Lock Check ...................... 6-12Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-22Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-56Inflator Kit, Tire ............................................... 5-66

7

InspectionBrake System ............................................. 6-14Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-14Exhaust System .......................................... 6-13Fuel System ............................................... 6-13Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-13Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle

Boot and Seal ......................................... 6-13Instrument Panel

Overview ..................................................... 3-2Storage Area .............................................. 2-31

Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-14Instrument Panel (I/P)

Cluster ....................................................... 3-23Integrated Windshield Antenna .......................... 3-81Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-14

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-36

KKey Lock Cylinders Service .............................. 6-10Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4Keys ............................................................... 2-2

LLamps

Exterior ...................................................... 3-11Interior ....................................................... 3-14

Lamps On Reminder ....................................... 3-12Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-12LATCH System

Child Restraints ........................................... 1-31Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System ........................................ 1-33Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-6Leaving Your Vehicle ......................................... 2-9Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running ... 2-21Light

Airbag Off .................................................. 3-26Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-25Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-29Brake System Warning ................................. 3-28Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-35Charging System ......................................... 3-27Check Gages Warning ................................. 3-36Cruise Control ............................................. 3-35Highbeam On ............................................. 3-36Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-30Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-36Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-24Security ..................................................... 3-35

8

Light (cont.)TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-29Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-29

Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors .............................. 2-12Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-31Locks

Door ........................................................... 2-7Leaving Your Vehicle ..................................... 2-9Power Door .................................................. 2-8Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13

MMaintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ............ 5-91Maintenance Schedule

At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10At Least Twice a Year ................................... 6-9Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-14Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-14Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-13Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-13How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............... 6-9

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ....... 6-13Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ............................................... 6-15Part E - Maintenance Record ......................... 6-17Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-5Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle

Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-13Using .......................................................... 6-4Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-49Making Turns ................................................. 4-47Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-30Manually Open Tonneau .................................. 3-47Map Pocket ................................................... 2-31Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-6Memory Seat ................................................. 2-44Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-45Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/

Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance ..................... 7-4

MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-24Outside Automatic Dimming Heated Mirror ...... 2-26Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-25Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-25

Mode Knob .................................................... 3-19MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

9

NNew Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-14Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 5-91

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-24Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-24Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12Oil

Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-35Engine ....................................................... 5-14Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-34

Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine .......................... 3-48Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-20Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3Opening the Cargo Cover ................................ 2-32Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-4Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-21Outside

Automatic Dimming Heated Mirror .................. 2-26Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-25Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-25

Overseas — Customer Assistance ...................... 7-4Owners, Canadian ............................................... iiOwner’s Information ........................................ 7-10

PParade Dimming ............................................. 3-15Park (P)

Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-21Parking

Brake ........................................................ 2-19Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-22

Parking Brake and Automatic TransmissionPark (P) Mechanism Check ........................... 6-12

Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-48Park(P)

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-20Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............. 6-4Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................... 6-9Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-13Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-15Part E - Maintenance Record ............................ 6-17Passenger Door Ajar ....................................... 3-48Passenger Position, Safety Belts ....................... 1-19Passenger’s Seat ............................................. 1-3Passing ................................................. 4-12, 4-46Passlock® ...................................................... 2-14Payload ......................................................... 4-37Perimeter Lighting ........................................... 3-15Personalization ............................................... 3-44Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7

10

Playing a CD ......................................... 3-65, 3-75Playing a Specific Loaded CD .......................... 3-76Playing the Radio ................................... 3-59, 3-68Power

Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-16Door Locks .................................................. 2-8Electrical System ......................................... 5-81Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-36Seat ............................................................ 1-2Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-31Windows .................................................... 2-11

Power Steering ............................................... 4-10Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-8Programming HomeLink® ................................. 2-28Programming the HomeLink Transmitter ............. 2-27Programming the Power Windows ..................... 2-11Put Vehicle in Park ......................................... 3-48

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-11

RRadio Data System (RDS) ....................... 3-62, 3-72Radio Messages ............................................. 3-65Radios .......................................................... 3-58

Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-81Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-81Radio with CD ............................................ 3-59Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-68Setting the Time .......................................... 3-59Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-80Understanding Reception .............................. 3-81

RDS Messages ...................................... 3-64, 3-74Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-42Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-21Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-24Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-31Reduce Speed ............................................... 3-48Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-36Relay Center .................................................. 5-87Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5

11

Removing the Cargo Cover .............................. 2-33Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-48Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-35Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ................................... 7-9General Motors ............................................. 7-9United States Government .............................. 7-8

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button ....... 2-30Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-30Restraint System Check .................................... 6-9

Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-52Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash .......................................... 1-53Rfa X Battery Low .......................................... 3-49Roadside

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-30Roof Ajar ....................................................... 3-49Roof Cycle Timeout ......................................... 3-49Roof Hall Switch Fault ..................................... 3-50Roof Tonneau ................................................. 2-37Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-23

SSafety Belt

Reminder Light ............................................ 3-24Safety Belts

Care of ...................................................... 5-75Driver Position ............................................ 1-12How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-12Passenger Position ...................................... 1-19Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-11Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-19Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-18Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-6

Safety Chains ................................................. 4-45Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-5Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-6Seats

Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4Memory ..................................................... 2-44Power Seats ................................................. 1-2Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-6

12

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System ................... 1-33Passenger Seat Position ............................... 1-36

Security Light ................................................. 3-35Select ........................................................... 3-44Service ........................................................... 5-3

Adding Equipment to the Outside of YourVehicle ..................................................... 5-5

Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-30Publications Ordering Information ..................... 7-9

Service Air Bag .............................................. 3-50Service Brake System ..................................... 3-50Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-10Service Manuals ............................................... 7-9Setting Preset PTYs ................................ 3-64, 3-73Setting Preset Stations ............................ 3-61, 3-70Setting the Time ............................................. 3-59Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .................. 3-61, 3-70Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-78Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-20Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-21Sidemarker Lamps .......................................... 5-46Side-Saddle Storage ....................................... 2-37Skidding ........................................................ 4-14Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-19

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-74Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-90Speedometer .................................................. 3-24Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-11Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-16Steering ........................................................ 4-10Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-11Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot

and Seal Inspection ..................................... 6-13Steering Tips .................................................. 4-10Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-80Stop Vehicle .................................................. 3-50Storage

Side-Saddle ................................................ 2-37Storage Areas

Cargo Net System ....................................... 2-36Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-31Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-31Glove Box .................................................. 2-31Instrument Panel Storage Area ...................... 2-31Map Pocket ................................................ 2-31

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-30Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-12Switchbanks

Center Console ........................................... 3-16

13

TTachometer .................................................... 3-24Tailgate ........................................................... 2-9Taillamps ....................................................... 5-46TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-29Temperature Knob ........................................... 3-18Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-13Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-80Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-12

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-12Passlock® ................................................... 2-14

Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-4Tire Inflator Kit Storage .................................... 5-72Tire Sealant ................................................... 5-67Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-52Tire Size ....................................................... 5-53Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-54Tires ............................................................. 5-51

Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-59Chains ....................................................... 5-64If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-65Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-56Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-57Tire Inflator Kit ............................................ 5-66

Tires (cont.)Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-60Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-61Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-62When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-58

Tlat (Tonneau Latch) Hall Switch Fault ............... 3-50Tonn (Tonneau) Hall Switch Fault ...................... 3-51Tonn (Tonneau) Latd (Latched) Switch Fault ....... 3-51Top Strap ...................................................... 1-29Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-31Torque Lock ................................................... 2-21Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-42Towing

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 4-31Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-31Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-38Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-30

TractionControl System (TCS) .................................... 4-8Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-29

Traction Active ................................................ 3-51Trailer

Recommendations ....................................... 4-38Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-46

14

Trailer Wiring Harness ..................................... 4-49Trans (Transmission) Hot Idle ........................... 3-51Transmission

Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-17Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit

Repair Manual ............................................ 7-10Transportation Options ...................................... 7-7Trip Information .............................................. 3-42Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-24Turn and Lane Change Signals .......................... 3-5Turn Signal On ............................................... 3-51Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-5Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-47

UUnderbody Flushing Service ............................. 6-12Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-81Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-60United States — Customer Assistance ................. 7-4Unknown Speed ............................................. 3-51Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-73Using HomeLink® ........................................... 2-30Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-78

VVehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-5Damage Warnings ........................................... ivLoading ...................................................... 4-31Symbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ............................................. 5-80Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-80

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC ........................................................... 3-52Memory Seat .............................................. 2-44

Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-36Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-21Visor Vanity Mirror .......................................... 2-12Visors ........................................................... 2-12

15

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-22Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-45Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-3Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-4Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv

Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-76Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-10Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-40Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-41What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-16What to Add .................................................. 5-34What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-18What to Use .......................... 5-25, 5-31, 5-32, 5-42Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-61Replacement ............................................... 5-62

When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-15When to Change Engine Oil

(GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-17When to Check .............................................. 5-57

When to Check and Change Lubricant ............... 5-42When to Check and Change the Automatic

Transmission Fluid ....................................... 5-21When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..... 5-20When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking

on a Hill ..................................................... 4-48When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................... 5-31Why Safety Belts Work ..................................... 1-8Windows ....................................................... 2-10

Power ........................................................ 2-11Windshield Washer

Fluid .......................................................... 5-32Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................. 6-9Windshield Wiper

Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-48Fuses ........................................................ 5-81

Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-7Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26Winter Tires ................................................... 5-52Wiper Blade Check ......................................... 6-10

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

16

2003 Chevrolet SSR Owner Manual M - General … · Service and Appearance Care ... 2003 Chevrolet...

Documents

Transcript of 2003 Chevrolet SSR Owner Manual M - General … · Service and Appearance Care ... 2003 Chevrolet...